JP2012106020A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce a control burden on a game control means.SOLUTION: The game control means determines whether a display result of variable display of first identification information of a first variable display part or second identification information of a second variable display part is a specific display result and transmits a first display result command or a second display result command which specifies the determination result. Therefore, a display control means determines whether the result is a specific display result on the basis of one command. Thus, the number of commands the game control means transmits is decreased and control burden on the game control means is reduced.

Description

  The present invention starts the variable display of the first identification information and derives and displays the display result based on the fact that the first start condition for variable display is satisfied after the first execution condition for variable display is satisfied. A variable display unit and a second display for deriving and displaying a display result by starting variable display of the second identification information based on the fact that the second start condition for variable display is satisfied after the second execution condition for variable display is satisfied. A variable display unit, and when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit, the game machine shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, if a special condition such as a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a special specific display result (special display result) of the specific display results in the variable display device, the jackpot is subsequently obtained. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In such a gaming machine, the game control means transmits a display result command capable of specifying the display result of the variable display of the identification information, and the identification information is displayed in the variable display device based on the display result command received by the display control means. In some cases, the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. For example, Patent Document 1 derives and displays a left middle right stop symbol on a variable display device as a display result of variable display based on the fact that the display control means receives a command for designating a left middle right stop symbol. A gaming machine is described.

JP 2000-317092 A (paragraph 0105-0111, FIG. 26)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the control burden of the game control means is large.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control burden of the game control means.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first start condition of the variable display is satisfied after the first execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 13) (for example, The first variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) that starts variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on the end of the variable display and derives and displays the display result. ) And the second execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 14), the second start condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the end of the previous variable display) And a second variable display unit (for example, second special symbol display 8b) for starting the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result. , Either the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when a constant display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and a game control means for controlling the progress of the game ( For example, the game control microcomputer 560) and effect information corresponding to variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit and variable display of the second identification information on the second variable display unit (for example, background symbols) ) Display control means (for example, for effect control) that controls the display state of a predetermined effect display unit (for example, each of the background display unit 9c and each variable display device when two variable display devices are provided) And the game control means determines whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit a specific display result. The first pre-determining means (for example, the part that executes steps S1509, S1510, and S1519 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit are used as the specific display result. Second pre-determining means for determining whether or not to perform (for example, a part that executes the same process as steps S1509, S1510, and S1519 in the second special symbol normal process in the game control microcomputer 560), and a first pre-determination First display result command transmission means for transmitting a first display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the means (for example, steps S332a to S343a according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG. 34A in the game control microcomputer 560) And the second pre-determining means Second display result command transmission means for transmitting a second display result command capable of specifying the determination result (for example, steps S332b to S343b are executed according to the second command transmission table shown in FIG. 34B in the game control microcomputer 560) The first display result command transmission means and the second display result command transmission means transmit a common command as the first display result command and the second display result command, and the game control means Based on the determination result of the predetermining means, the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is executed, and the display result is derived to the first variable display unit based on the passage of the variable display time. First variable display execution means for displaying (for example, steps S209 and S210 in the game control microcomputer 560) (S351 to S356, S161, S1301 to S1305 are executed) and the second identification information of the second variable display unit is variably displayed based on the determination result of the second pre-determining means, and the variable display time is Based on the elapse of time, second variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result on the second variable display unit (for example, steps S209, S210, S351 to S356, S161, S1301 to S1305 in the game control microcomputer 560). The display control means includes a predetermined determination result information storage means for storing predetermined determination result information indicating a determination result by the first predetermined determination means and the second predetermined determination means, Before the first display result command is transmitted by the one display result command transmission means or the second display result command transmitter A pre-determined result information clearing unit for clearing the pre-determined result information stored in the pre-determined result information storing unit based on the reception of the predetermined command before the second display result command is transmitted, and clearing the pre-determined result information After the predetermined result information stored in the predetermined result information storage means is cleared by the means, the first display result command transmitted by the first display result command transmission means or the second display result command transmitted by the second display result command transmission means. (2) Predetermined result information storage control means for controlling the predetermined result information specified by the display result command to be stored in the predetermined result information storage means; Based on the read pre-determined result information, variable display of the production information of the predetermined production display unit was executed Sometimes, an effect display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result on a predetermined effect display unit based on the passage of the variable display time (for example, steps S1825 to S1831, S941 to S987, S611 in the effect control microcomputer 100) S645, a portion for executing S1870 to S1876).

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display method of a symbol reservation memory | storage display part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of variation pattern of a background symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for jackpot symbol setting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st deviation symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st big hit symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st big hit symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st big winning opening opening post-process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st small hit opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st small hit | end process. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of effect design command control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of effect design command control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a command transmission table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number used by production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows production content determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st design process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variable display of the background symbol in the background symbol display part in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variable display of the background symbol in the background symbol display part in a variable display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the effect when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the effect when the display result command cannot be received correctly due to garbled data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation example of the presentation control means when a display result command and a decoration design stop designation | designated command cannot be received correctly. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of the relay board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for symbol control in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the other circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer 100b for sound / lamp control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer to the symbol control microcomputer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the transmission timing of each effect control command in the case of using a common variation pattern command and a common display result command with a symbol variation designation command.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 1 as seen from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. Also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, a variable display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the variable display device 9 has a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition which is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first decorative symbol display unit 9a) for variably displaying an effect decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) and displaying the display result, and a second start condition that is a second execution condition A display for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols for presentation (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment (for example, that the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) An area (hereinafter referred to as a second decorative symbol display unit 9b) and a display region (hereinafter referred to as a display region) that allows the player to visually recognize the display contents more easily than the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. Background pattern display section 9c). “Easy to visually recognize the display content” means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as a background symbol) in the three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed (except for the stop before the so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two decorative symbol display units (first decorative symbol display unit 9a and second decorative symbol display unit 9b). In the background symbol effect unit 9c, Since an effect corresponding to one of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the two decorative symbol display units is executed, the status of the decorative symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) Or not). In this embodiment, the predetermined effect display unit is realized by the background symbol display unit 9c that performs variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. .

  The first decorative symbol display unit 9 a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9 b are not provided as a part of the display area of the variable display device 9. You may implement | achieve with the simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) which can carry out variable display of the number. Further, for example, the first decorative symbol display unit 9 a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9 b may be realized by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) provided separately from the variable display device 9. In addition, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b may be configured by a display such as a lamp or LED.

  A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper portion of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. The special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are configured to variably display more types of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. Also good. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. Different characters may be included.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of the first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of reserved memories. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first decorative symbol display unit 9a performs variable display of decorative symbols as decorative symbols (effects) during the special symbol variable display time by the first special symbol indicator 8a. Further, the second decorative symbol display unit 9b performs variable display of decorative symbols as decorative symbols during the special symbol variable display time by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes characters 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second decorative design is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. Different characters may be included.

  The display screen of the variable display device 9 is formed with the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved storage number, and the variable winning ball device 15 in a state in which the game balls can be easily received. 2 There is an area (hereinafter referred to as a symbol hold storage display section 18c) that displays the total number (total number of hold storages) that is the sum of the number of effective winning balls entered into the start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. In this embodiment, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is easy to accept the game ball is when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. As described above, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c is not provided on the display screen of the variable display device 9, but may be configured by eight indicators such as lamps and LEDs. In addition, instead of providing the symbol hold memory display unit 18c for displaying the total hold memory number on the display screen of the variable display device 9, the first hold memory display unit for displaying the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number are displayed. You may make it provide the 2nd storage memory display part to display.

  In addition, when displaying the total reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c, the display corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the display corresponding to the second reserved memory number may be displayed in different colors. Good. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 newly increases when the display number of the total reserved memory number to be displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by one based on the first reserved memory number being increased by one. The display to be displayed is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, red). In addition, when the display number of the total reserved memory number to be displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 based on the fact that the second reserved memory number has increased by 1, the display to be newly increased is displayed in the first reserved memory number. Is displayed in a different display color (for example, green). In this case, for example, when a command for the number of reserved memories is normally transmitted, a command indicating the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and a common reserved memory number command are used. Is transmitted, and the power control to the gaming machine is stopped when the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to recognize and distinguish between the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the number of reserved memories. When the power supply is resumed after the display, all the displays are displayed in the same display color (the display corresponding to the first reserved memory number corresponds to the second reserved memory number) when the display of the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is restored. A display color that cannot be specified for display may be displayed in blue (for example, blue). For example, when the power supply is resumed after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command indicating that the power failure has been recovered, and specifies only the reserved memory number. A possible command (for example, a command capable of specifying the total number of pending storage) is transmitted. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot recognize the number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, so that all displays are displayed in the same display color based on the received command. By doing so, the display of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is restored. Thereafter, when a reserved memory number command that can specify the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is received, the display color is changed to a normal display color (display color different between the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number). do it. It should be noted that a display that cannot be specified whether it is a display corresponding to the first reserved memory number or a display corresponding to the second reserved memory number after recovery from the power failure is digested (variation with respect to the reserved memory number is executed). ) Until the first display color is displayed (the display color corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the display color corresponding to the second reserved memory number cannot be specified).

  In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b has four displays such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c. However, in order to make it difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display device of another mode may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are an example. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, a winning device having a first start winning opening 13 is provided below the variable display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the first starting winning port 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 (easier to start winning), and it is advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only at the lower part of the second starting winning port 14 is provided. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball apparatus that opens and closes is provided at any lower portion of the start winning opening 14.

  Below the variable winning ball device 15, a specific gaming state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 8 a or the second special symbol display unit 8 b. Is provided with a special variable winning ball apparatus which is opened by a solenoid 21. The special variable winning ball apparatus includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a large winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided below the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, one ordinary symbol display 10 and one variable winning ball device 15 are provided. However, when two variable winning ball devices are provided, two normal symbol displays are provided. May be.

  A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) And the first special symbol display unit 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display unit 9a displays the first decorative symbol. Variable display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number displayed on the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by one. In addition, a command for specifying the first reserved memory number (a first start winning memory specifying command to be described later) is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means, so that the symbol reserved memory display section increases as the first reserved memory number increases. The total pending storage number (total number) displayed in 18c is increased. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously. In this embodiment, the first start condition is satisfied when the previous variable display of the first special symbol is completed.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second ornament is displayed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. The variable display of symbols is started. In other words, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number displayed on the second special symbol hold memory display 18b on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by one. Further, a command for designating the second reserved memory number (second start winning memory designation command described later) is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means, whereby the symbol reserved memory display section increases as the second reserved memory number increases. The total pending storage number (total number) displayed in 18c is increased. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously. In this embodiment, the second start condition is satisfied when the previous variable display of the second special symbol is completed.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the game state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to a normal state other than the big hit game state. In a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), a special variable winning ball apparatus until a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins a big winning opening. (Big prize opening) is opened. One round in the big hit gaming state is a period until a certain period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening, or when a certain period has passed since the opening of the big winning opening, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that a V winning area may be provided in the grand prize opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the big prize opening is open.

  When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a to a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Is the normal state (also referred to as a normal gaming state) and the short-time state (a time-shortening state in which the variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, a gaming state advantageous to the player) This is an even more advantageous state for the player, which is a higher probability change state (an example of a special gaming state advantageous to the player) than an example of the special gaming state. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and is controlled to the probability variation state, that is, when the probability variation state is entered, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes the big hit symbol. Not only will the probability increase, but the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b will be a big hit symbol also increases. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the normal state.

  The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When the second special symbol display unit 8b determines that the stop symbol at the time when the second special symbol fluctuates is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is controlled to a special gaming state in which the probability of the next big hit is higher than the probability in the normal state and the short time state. That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined that the probability is changed internally, and when the change of the special symbol is stopped at the end of the special symbol variation display as described above, the odd symbol of the left, middle and right is displayed as the stop symbol. When stopped and displayed in a uniform state), it is determined that a predetermined transition condition has been established, and the state is shifted to a certain change state. In addition, by notifying that it has been promoted to be probable in a re-lottery effect to be described later, it is shifted to the probable state as a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and is controlled to the special gaming state after the big hit gaming state, there is a probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol. In addition to the increase, the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the normal state.

  In the probability variation state as the special game state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols ( The probability of becoming a specific display result (for example, an odd number of 0 to 9) is increased from the normal state. Further, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased from the normal state, and one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased from the normal state. This is a more advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state, the variable display time (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is made shorter than the normal state. Also good. In such a case, variable display of special symbols is frequently executed, which also increases the possibility of occurrence of jackpots per predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 may be made shorter than that in the normal state. In that case, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is more likely to occur, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b within a predetermined period increases, and the second special symbol is increased. Is more likely to be a big hit symbol than in the normal state, making it more advantageous for the player. Furthermore, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol may be increased, or the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is released may be increased or the opening time may be lengthened.

  There may be a difference between the special game state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probability variation symbol and the special game state when the stop symbol of the second special symbol becomes a probability variation symbol. For example, the special game state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol is changed to a probable state, and the special game state when the stop symbol of the second special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol is set to a short time state (a big hit occurs) (The game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), but when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol, the stop symbol of the second special symbol You may comprise so that it may become a more advantageous state for a player than when it becomes a probable variation symbol. By configuring as such, the interest given to the player can be further improved.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display section 9b.

  Further, when the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a, the first ornament symbol display portion 9a is a decorative symbol that reminds the probability variation symbol (for example, “0” to “9” other than “−”). ) Is stopped. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 8b, a special ornament symbol (for example, “0” to “9” other than “−”) that reminds the probability variation symbol on the second ornament symbol display portion 9b. ) Is stopped.

  In the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the same background symbol is stopped and displayed on the left and right during variable display. Although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. Displayed (the background symbols are finally stopped in the three display areas). If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three background symbols with the middle right aligned. Hereinafter, such background symbols are also referred to as jackpot symbols.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which variable display ends is stopped and displayed, variable display of the background symbol ends. However, in this embodiment, exceptionally, the variable display of the background symbol may end when the special symbol whose variable display ends earlier is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for the background symbols that have not stopped yet when the stopped background symbols constitute part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) And all or some of the background symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 9c. The display area in the middle is in a state where the variable display is still being performed, and the state in which all or part of the display area is synchronously displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 9c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 9c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) is displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (a ground color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 and is variable. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 to generate a big hit gaming state. An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information shown to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine. In this embodiment, the case where the system reset circuit is mounted on the power supply board 910 will be described. However, the main board 31 has a system reset circuit for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on. It may be. Further, the payout control board 37 may be equipped with a system reset circuit.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c. Do.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the display control of the variable display device 9, the sound output control of the sound output device 27, and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c are performed using one control board (production control board 80). Although a case where display control is performed will be described, a plurality of control boards may be used. For example, in addition to the effect control board 80 for effect control, a lamp driver board for controlling each lamp and a sound output board for controlling the sound output device may be provided. In this case, the effect control means is realized by a control microcomputer and a control circuit mounted on the lamp driver board and the sound output board in addition to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the display control means is realized by an effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the variable display device 9.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the production control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver 352, and the speech synthesis IC 173 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to display the symbol hold storage display unit 18c. As shown in FIG. 4A, up to eight total numbers can be displayed as a total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c. When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special symbol is not in a state that can be started, the first special symbol reservation memory is stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The first reserved storage number displayed on the display 18a is increased by one. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second special symbol reserved memory is obtained on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The second reserved memory number displayed on the display 18b is increased by one. In addition, a command for specifying the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number (a first start prize memory designation command or a second start prize memory designation command) is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means. As the number of one reserved memory and the number of second reserved memories increase, the number of reserved memories (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is increased (see FIG. 4B).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 5 and 6 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the CPU 56 Starts the main processing after step S1. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches the specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high power By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a predetermined delay time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display symbol random number update process (step S17) and the initial value determination random number update process (step S18). When the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the CPU 56 disables the interrupt (step S16), and when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are finished, The interrupt is permitted (step S19).

  The display symbol random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol indicator 8. In this embodiment, as the display symbol random number, there are a variation pattern determining random number for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, and a reach determination random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated. Used. The display symbol random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display symbol random number.

  The initial value determining random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number. Random numbers for determining the initial value are random numbers for determination to determine the type of jackpot (for example, whether to generate a jackpot symbol for determining a special symbol that generates a jackpot or a hit based on a normal symbol) This is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a normal random number for determination per symbol). A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as a variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are executed, the interrupt is disabled. The display symbol random number update process and the initial value determination random number update process are described later. This is to avoid contention with the process in the timer interrupt process because the process is also executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S25 and S26 of the timer interrupt process). That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S17 and S18 and the counter value for generating the display symbol random number and the initial value determining random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can easily perform initial initialization by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch 914) while the clear switch 921 is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps SS16 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch) Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for outputting and clearing the DG signal to various displays such as the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator (step S22). Next, the CPU 56 executes an abnormal winning notification process for notifying that an abnormal winning to the special winning opening has been detected (step S23). Specifically, the count switch 23 is turned on in spite of the fact that it is before opening the special winning opening in the special symbol process process described later (specifically, in the process of steps S300 to S305 described later). Is detected, it is determined that an abnormal winning in the big winning opening has been detected, and control is performed to notify.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value determining random number (initial value determining random number updating process: step S25). Furthermore, CPU56 performs the process which updates the count value of the counter for producing | generating a display symbol random number (display symbol random number update process: step S26).

  When the random number update process, the initial value determination random number update process, and the display symbol random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process process (step S27A). In the first special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process (step S27B). In the second special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the second special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to a decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (effect symbol command control process: step S29). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30). As will be described later, in the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the first special symbol process flag and the second special symbol process flag can take values from “0” to “11”. Further, when the value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is “9” to “11” among these values, the process relating to the small hit is executed. Therefore, when external information is output in the information output process, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the information is related to the small hit and output it as the small hit information. For example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the current value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is “9” or more. Is determined and output as small hits information. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is “5” to “11”, the process for controlling the opening of the big winning opening (when the big hit and the small hit are Are included). Therefore, when outputting external information in the information output process, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the information is information related to the opening control of the special winning opening. For example, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the current value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag is “5” or more. External information is output.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like (step S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a test terminal process which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine (step S32). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S33: Solenoid output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S34).

  The CPU 56 also displays special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in accordance with the value of the first special symbol process flag or the second special symbol process flag. A special symbol display control process to be set in the output buffer for setting is performed (step S35).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S36).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S37). In this case, when the gaming state is a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 1 indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. Further, when the gaming state is the short time state, the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp 2 indicating the short time state is set in the output buffer.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S21 to S37 (except for steps S30 and S32) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S38) and ends the process.

  8 and 9 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S27A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. . As described above, in the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus is executed. The program for the second special symbol process (step S27B) is similarly configured. That is, in the following description, if “first” is read as “second” and “second” is read as “first”, the second special symbol process will be described.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by the two displays of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. . In this embodiment, control is performed so that the big hit based on the fact that the big win symbol is derived and displayed on the two displays is not generated at the same time.

  The game control microcomputer 560 has a first start port switch for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 13 provided in the game board 6 when performing the first special symbol process. If 13a is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 is generated (step S321), a first start opening switch passing process (step S322) is performed. If the first start port switch 13a is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S324 as it is.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any one of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit end process (step S324). After executing the processes of S325 and S326, the first special symbol process is terminated. Otherwise, after executing the processing of steps S327 and S328, depending on the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag), the processing of any of steps S300 to S311 is performed. Do. In this embodiment, the values corresponding to the second jackpot symbol stop process to the second jackpot end process are continuous values (for example, 4 to 8). Therefore, the determination process of step S324 of the CPU 56 can be simplified. As will be described later, instead of the first big hit symbol stop process (second big hit symbol stop process) and the first missed symbol stop process (second missed symbol stop process), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (first 2 (special symbol variation stop processing), in step S324, whether the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any of the second big winning opening opening pre-processing to the second big winning end processing You may make it confirm whether or not. And when it is a value according to any of the second big winning opening opening pre-processing to the second big winning end processing, the first special symbol process processing is ended after executing the processing of steps S325 and S326. Otherwise, any one of steps S300 to S311 may be performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value (for example, 4 to 11) corresponding to any one of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second small hit end process. In addition, the first special symbol process may be terminated after the processes of steps S325 and S326 are executed. If this is not the case, after executing the processes of steps S327 and S328, any one of steps S300 to S311 may be performed according to the internal state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where a big hit is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first special symbol even though the small hit is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the second special symbol. Can do. As will be described later, instead of the first big hit symbol stop process (second big hit symbol stop process) and the first missed symbol stop process (second missed symbol stop process), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (first 2 special symbol variation stop processing), in step S324, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to one of the second big winning opening opening pre-processing to the second small hit end processing. It may be confirmed whether or not. And when it is a value according to any of the second big winning opening opening pre-processing to the second small hit end processing, the first special symbol process processing is ended after executing the processing of steps S325 and S326. Otherwise, any one of steps S300 to S311 may be performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  In step S325, the game control microcomputer 560 is changing the first decorative symbol and the first special symbol, and has not yet transmitted the first interruption designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Confirm whether or not. If it is not changing, or if it is already changing and the first interrupt designation command has already been transmitted (for example, the transmitted flag is set by setting the transmitted flag when the first interrupt designation command is transmitted) If it has been changed), the process ends, but if the first interruption designation command has not been transmitted yet, the first interruption designation command has been transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. The process is terminated later (step S326). In step S327, after the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first interruption designation command (for example, the transmission completion flag is set so that the transmission completion flag is set when the first interruption designation command is transmitted). When the process of step S327 is executed, the process of any one of steps S300 to S311 is performed after transmitting the first restart designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first special symbol are changing, and whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the processing in step S302. It can be determined by Further, whether or not the second big hit game is being executed can be determined by the second special symbol process flag. That is, when the value of the second special symbol process flag handled in the second special symbol process is a value corresponding to steps S306 to S309, it is determined that the second big hit game is being executed.

  By the above processing, when the second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and from when the big hit game corresponding to the second big hit symbol is stopped until the end notification is made (for example, the second big prize winning opening During the opening process or the second big hit end process), the process of steps S300 to S311 is not executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is changing, the measurement of the changing time using the first changing time timer in the first special symbol changing process is interrupted.

  In addition to interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be interrupted. In this case, for example, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any one of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 has the first special symbol. The display 8a stops displaying the shifted symbol and interrupts the variation of the first special symbol. When the value of the second special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to a process other than the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit stop process, the production control microcomputer 100 resumes the measurement of the variation time. Then, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is resumed. When the change in the first special symbol is interrupted and restarted, the change in the first decorative symbol is also interrupted and restarted in synchronization.

  When receiving the first interrupt designation command, the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 interrupts the measurement of the variation (variable display) of the first decorative symbol. When the first restart designation command is received, measurement of the variation of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S311 are as follows.

  First special symbol normal process (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number). The number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. Further, if the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is the specific display result ( Decide whether or not to win. In the case of a specific display result, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. A variable pattern of variable display of the first special symbol (corresponding to the variable time here), a plurality of types determined in advance according to the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern (one of the display symbol random numbers) extracted at the time of start winning The first variation pattern is selected. In addition, the variation pattern command is set in the variation pattern buffer in order to transmit information for commanding the first variation pattern (first variation pattern command, that is, the first variable display pattern command) to the production control microcomputer 100. . Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  First special symbol variation process (step S302): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the first variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the special symbol process timer becomes 0), the big hit or the small hit Is determined, control is performed so that the internal state (first special symbol process flag) shifts to step S304 (first big hit symbol stop process). If it is determined to be off, control is performed so that the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is shifted to step S303 (first off symbol stop processing).

  First off symbol stop process (step S303): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. In the first off symbol stop process, the first special symbol (out of symbol) in the first special symbol display 8a is stopped. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S300 (first special symbol normal process).

  First big hit symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. In the first big hit symbol stop process, the first special symbol (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) in the first special symbol indicator 8a is stopped. If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S305 (first big winning opening release pre-processing). Alternatively, if the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a small hit symbol, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S308 (first small hit pre-processing).

  Separate symbol stop processing (first off symbol stop processing and first big hit symbol stop processing) for the case where the winning symbol (big hit symbol and small hit symbol) is derived and displayed and the case where the off symbol is derived and displayed. Instead of executing, a common symbol stop process may be executed. In this case, for example, the first special symbol process process includes a first special symbol variation stop process instead of the first big hit symbol stop process and the first off-line symbol stop process. Further, in the first special symbol variation process, when the variation time has elapsed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is controlled to shift to the first special symbol variation stop process.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation stopping process, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a is stopped. When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to the pre-opening process for the first big prize opening. Alternatively, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a small hit symbol, the internal state is updated so that the (first special symbol process flag) shifts to the first small hit pre-release process. Otherwise, the internal state is updated to shift to the first special symbol normal process.

  In this embodiment, the special winning opening is changed to one of a first state (open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player. In this embodiment, when the game state shifts to the big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the big prize opening to the first state for a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Control to end by doing.

  Also, in this embodiment, so-called sudden probability change big hits (the big hits that give a special effect to the player as if the game state has suddenly shifted to the probability change state, instead of progressing each round in order) May be transferred to. When the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly shifts to the probable big hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the winning prize opening for a period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Ends by changing to the first state in at least one of the above, and the probability that the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit symbol after the suddenly probable big hit gaming state ends is improved from the normal state and starts Control is made to the first high probability state in which the ease of entering the game medium into the area is the same as the normal state. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 has the same probability as the first high probability state that the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes the big hit symbol after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state ends, and the first high probability. You may make it control to the 2nd high probability state set so that the game medium may approach into a starting area from a state. Note that the state where the game medium is set to be easy to enter the start area specifically means that the frequency at which the start winning opening 14 is opened is increased and the ease of winning the game ball is improved as compared to the normal state. It is a state (high base state). For example, the game state is controlled to the second high probability state by shifting to the high probability state and shifting to the short time state. Further, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state of normal probability change big hit (15 round probability change big hits other than sudden probability change), the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are big hit after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of becoming a symbol is the same as the first high-probability state, and the second high-probability state is set in which the game medium is more likely to enter the starting area than the first high-probability state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game is shifted to so-called small hits (a win that does not cause a change in the game state before and after the occurrence, opens the big prize opening for a short time and performs a special performance). There is. When the game control microcomputer 560 shifts to the small hit game state, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first prize winning port in the same period as the sudden probability change game state (or the same number of times as the sudden probability change game state and the same number of times as the sudden probability change game state). The game state is terminated by changing to a state, and the game state immediately before the start of the small hit gaming state is controlled as the gaming state after the small hit gaming state ends. In the small hit gaming state, the big prize opening may be suddenly changed to the first state for a different period or a different number of times from the probability variation gaming state.

  First big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first grand prize opening pre-processing, control for opening the special prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306. The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting a round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes the specific game state transition control means by executing the first grand prize opening pre-processing. Further, the specific game state transition control means may be defined as being realized by the performance control microcomputer 100 executing the first jackpot display process. That is, the time point when the specific gaming state is started may be the time point when the effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is started. In this case, the specific time from the point in time when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result on the variable display device 9 corresponds to the period during which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the post-processing after opening the first big winning opening is set by the process timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  First big prize opening opening post-process (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Processing such as checking whether there is a remaining round in the big hit gaming state is performed. If there is still a remaining round, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S305. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) according to step S308.

  First big hit end process (step S308): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  First small hit opening pre-processing (step S309: This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 9. In the first small hit pre-opening processing, control for opening the big winning opening is performed. The solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the large winning opening, and the execution time of the first small hit opening process is set by the process timer to set the internal state (first The special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S310 (in this example, 10), but the first small hit pre-opening process is executed for each round. The process for opening a small hit game is a process for starting a small hit game.

  First small hit opening process (step S310): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 10. A control for sending an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. Further, when the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, the control for closing the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special variable winning ball apparatus to close the special winning opening. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 in this example) according to step S311.

  First small hit end processing (step S311): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 11. Control to end the small hit gaming state. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passage process (step S322). In the first start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the first start winning memorized number indicated by the first start winning counter has reached the maximum value of 4 (step S3201). If the first start winning memory number has not reached 4, the CPU 56 increases the first starting winning memory number by 1 by adding 1 to the count number of the first start winning counter (step S3202). Further, the CPU 56 extracts values of random numbers (software random numbers) such as determination random numbers and display design random numbers, and stores them in a storage area (first special symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the first start winning memory number. (Step S3203). Note that extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits a first effect storage information designation command according to the value of the first start prize storage counter updated in step S3203 (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 transmits the first effect storage information 1 designation command when the updated first reserved memory number is 1, and the updated first reserved memory number is 2 when the updated first reserved memory number is 2. When the production storage information 2 designation command is transmitted and the updated first reserved memory number is 3, the first production memory information 3 designation command is transmitted, and the updated first pending memory number is 4 The first effect storage information 4 designation command is transmitted.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the display state of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a according to the changed value of the first reserved memory number counter (step S3205). That is, the first reserved memory number displayed on the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is set to a number corresponding to the changed value. Then, the first start port switch passing process is terminated.

  In step S3201, the first start winning memorized number is stored, but when the maximum start value of 4 is reached, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 11 to FIG. 13 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 11, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) are first decorations that are variably displayed on the first symbol display unit 9 a of the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of the first special symbols. This is an effect control command (first variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of symbols. The effect control command for designating the first variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), the first decoration symbol display unit 9a of the variable display device 9 starts variable display of the first decoration symbol. To control.

  Commands 8010 (H) to 8019 (H) designate a variation pattern of the second decorative symbol variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b of the variable display device 9 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. This is an effect control command (second variation pattern command). The effect control command for designating the second variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8010 (H) to 8019 (H), the second decoration design display unit 9b of the variable display device 9 starts variable display of the second decoration design. To control.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (first deviation designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the first decorative symbol designated by the first variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (first normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of variable display of the first decorative design designated by the first variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (first probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol designated by the first variation pattern command is the probability variation big hit.

  Command 8C03 (H) specifies that the probability variation jackpot has been determined in advance, sets the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15-round jackpot This is an effect control command (a probability variable big hit designation command with re-lottery during the first round) that designates execution of a re-lottery effect during a game round. The command 8C04 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 as a normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is an effect control command (specific change jackpot designation command with re-lottery after the end of the first big hit) that specifies execution of the re-lottery effect after the game is over. Command 8C05 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is an effect control command (specific change jackpot designation command with first re-lottery) for designating execution of a re-lottery effect during the game round and after the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the “re-lottery effect” is a state in which the same middle non-probable symbols (generally non-probable symbols are common, but they may be outliers) are arranged on the left and right background symbols in the variable display device 9. This is an effect in which the non-probability variable symbol in the aligned state is re-variable and the jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, a case in which a non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined execution timing will be described. In addition, the “re-lottery effect” has been promoted to be probable in an effect mode other than symbol variation, such as displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the variable display device 9 or displaying a sentence such as “probable big hit”. May be notified. In this embodiment, the re-lottery effect may be executed twice during the big hit game round and when the ending effect is executed after the big hit game ends. Hereinafter, the re-lottery effect executed during the round of the big hit game is also referred to as a re-lottery effect during the round, and the re-lottery effect executed in the ending after the end of the big hit game is also referred to as the post-hit re-lottery effect. The detailed contents of the re-lottery effect will be described later.

  The command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (first sudden probability variation big hit designation command) which designates that the display result of variable display of the first decorative design designated by the first variation pattern command is sudden probability variation big hit. Command 8C07 (H) is an effect control command (first small hit designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol designated by the first variation pattern command is a small hit. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined that the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol is a small hit, it is determined that the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol is suddenly a probable big hit. The same background symbols as those displayed are derived and displayed. For example, the same “123” symbol is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol when the probability variation big hit is determined and when the small hit is determined.

  The command 8C10 (H) is an effect control command (second deviation designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 8C11 (H) is an effect control command (second normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 8C12 (H) is an effect control command (second probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is the probability variation big hit.

  The command 8C13 (H) specifies that the probability variation jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is an effect control command (a probability variable big hit designation command with re-lottery during the second round) that designates execution of a re-lottery effect during a game round. The command 8C14 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot is determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 as the normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is an effect control command (specific change jackpot designation command with re-lottery after the end of the second jackpot) that designates execution of the re-lottery effect after the game ends. The command 8C15 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is an effect control command for specifying that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the game round and after the end of the big hit game (second variable lottery specifying command with second re-lottery).

  Command 8C16 (H) is an effect control command (second sudden probability variation big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative design designated by the second variation pattern command is sudden probability variation big hit. The command 8C17 (H) is an effect control command (second small hit designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is a small hit. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol is a small hit, it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol is a sudden probability big hit. The same background symbols as those displayed are derived and displayed. For example, the same “123” symbol is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol when the probability variation big hit is determined and when the small hit is determined.

  Hereinafter, a first off-limit designation command, a first normal jackpot designation command, a first probability variable jackpot designation command, a probability variation jackpot designation command with re-lottery during the first round, a probability variation jackpot designation command with re-lottery after the completion of the first jackpot, and a first The probability variation big hit designation command with re-lottery may be referred to as a first display result command. In addition, a second off-limit designation command, a second normal big hit designation command, a second probable big hit designation command, a probabilistic big hit designation command with re-lottery during the second round, a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery after the second big hit, and a second The probability variation big hit designation command with re-lottery may be referred to as a second display result command. In addition, when the first display result command and the second display result command are comprehensively expressed, they may be referred to as display result commands.

  The commands 8C03 (H) to 8C05 (H) and 8C13 (H) to 8C15 (H) are display result commands for designating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game (including the round and the ending). is there. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the display result command for designating the execution of the re-lottery effect is transmitted in a state where it can be recognized whether or not it is determined in advance if it is a probable big hit.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (first decoration symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of the first decoration symbol. Command 8F01 (H) is an effect control command (second decoration symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of the second decoration symbol.

  The command 8F10 (H) is an effect control command (first interruption designating command) for instructing interruption of measurement of variable display of decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display unit 9a, and the command 8F11 (H) is the first ornament. This is an effect control command (first restart designation command) for instructing restart of measurement of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 9a.

  The command 8F12 (H) is an effect control command (second interruption designation command) for instructing interruption of measurement of variable display of decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b, and the command 8F13 (H) is second ornamental symbols. This is an effect control command (second resume designation command) for instructing to resume measurement of variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 9b.

  The command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501 (H) is a state where the gaming state is in a high probability state after a probable big hit. Is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) transmitted when Command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability change state background designation command) transmitted when the gaming state is in a high probability state after sudden probability change big hit. Hereinafter, the effect control commands 9500 (H) to 9502 (H) are referred to as background designation commands. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the type of background to be displayed on the variable display device 9 in accordance with the received background designation command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command AXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Of these, A000 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a normal jackpot game. A001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change big hit start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of probability variation big hit game. A002 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability change big hit start designation command: third fanfare designation command) for designating the start of sudden probability change big hit game. A003 (H) is an effect control command (a big hit start specifying command with a re-lottery during round: fourth fanfare specifying command) that specifies execution of a re-lottery effect during the round of the big hit game. A 004 (H) is an effect control command (a fifth fanfare designation command with a big lottery start designation command with a re-lottery after the big hit is finished) that designates execution of a re-lottery effect in the ending production after the big hit game is over. A005 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start specifying command with re-lottery command: sixth fanfare specifying command) that specifies that a re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending effect during the big-hit game round and after the end of the jackpot game. .

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a big winning opening) that designates display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  A300 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game. A301 (H) is an effect control command (probability variation jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of probability variation jackpot game. A302 (H) is an effect control command (sudden probability variable jackpot end designation command: third ending designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot game. A303 (H) is an effect control command for specifying that the jackpot game is ended and that the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the jackpot game (a jackpot end specifying command with re-lottery during the round: fourth ending specifying command). It is. A304 (H) is an effect control command for specifying that the jackpot game is to be ended and that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending effect after the jackpot game is ended (a jackpot end designation command with a re-lottery after the jackpot is ended: fifth ending) Specified command). A305 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the jackpot game is to be ended, that the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the jackpot game, and that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending effect after the jackpot game ends. (Big jackpot end designation command with re-lottery: sixth ending designation command).

  A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command: seventh fanfare specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information specifying command) for specifying the first reserved storage number. Among them, the command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information 0 specifying command) that specifies that the first reserved storage number is 0. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information 1 specifying command) that specifies that the first reserved storage number is 1. Command C002 (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information 2 designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is 2. Command C003 (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information 3 specifying command) that specifies that the first reserved storage number is 3. Command C004 (H) is an effect control command (first effect storage information 4 designation command) for designating that the first reserved memory number is 4.

  Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information specifying command) for specifying the second reserved storage number. Among them, the command C010 (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information 0 specifying command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number is 0. The command C011 (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information 1 specifying command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number is 1. Command C012 (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information 2 designation command) for designating that the second reserved memory number is 2. Command C013 (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information 3 specifying command) for specifying that the second reserved storage number is 3. Command C014 (H) is an effect control command (second effect storage information 4 designation command) for designating that the second reserved memory number is 4.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 11 to 13 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. In FIG. 14, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative pattern having a 2-byte structure. “Time” indicates the variation time (variable display period of identification information) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In FIG. 14, the variation pattern whose EXT data is “00 (H)” to “09 (H)” is a variation pattern (first variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. In addition, the variation pattern in which the EXT data is “10 (H)” to “19 (H)” is the variation pattern (second variation pattern) of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  In this example, as a variation pattern of special symbols and decorative symbols, whether to make out, whether to make a big hit, whether to make a reach, whether to reach, whether to make a promising big hit A plurality of types are prepared according to the difference in various production modes, such as whether or not to suddenly make a big hit or whether to make a small hit. In this embodiment, the reach effect is performed using the background symbol display unit 9c of the variable display device 9 that performs variable display of the background symbol.

  The first fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “00 (H)” to “03 (H)” and the second fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “10 (H)” to “13 (H)” The variation pattern used. The first fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” and the second fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “14 (H)” to “16 (H)” It is a variation pattern used sometimes. The first variation pattern in which the EXT data is “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” and the second variation pattern in which the EXT data is “14 (H)” to “16 (H)” This is a variation pattern used for both the big hit fluctuation when the big hit is determined and the normal big hit when the big hit fluctuation is determined in advance.

  In addition, the first variation pattern in which the EXT data is “07 (H)” and the second variation pattern in which the EXT data is “17 (H)” are variation patterns that are used at the time of sudden probability variation big hit. Further, the first fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “08 (H)” and the second fluctuation pattern in which the EXT data is “18 (H)” are fluctuation patterns used at the time of small hit. Further, the first variation pattern in which the EXT data is “09 (H)” and the second variation pattern in which the EXT data is “19 (H)” are variation patterns of shortening variation.

  The “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach mode. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “Reach B” and “Reach C”. “Reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach A” and “reach C”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “reach B” and “reach C”. Further, the difference in reach mode means that a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character, or the like of a different mode appears in the reach change time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, a variation pattern having the same variation time of 10 seconds is used when suddenly probable big hit is determined and when small hit is determined. By doing so, the special symbol is displayed in a variably displayed state for the same 10 seconds both in the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not it is suddenly probable only by looking at the change display. can do. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 also displays a decorative pattern on the variable display device 9 for the same 10 seconds on the basis of the fact that it has received a variation pattern command that suddenly specifies the probability variation big hit or small hit. Let In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the variation display of the decorative pattern using the same mode (for example, the same background color) in the case of the sudden probability change big hit and the small hit.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of background pattern variation patterns (variation times). In this embodiment, 12 types of variation patterns (No. 1, No. 2, No. 4, No. 6, No. 9, and No. 2 * to No. 8 *) are present in the normal state and the probability variation state. Used. No. 2 * -No. The 8 * variation time is No. 2-No. 8 is the same as the fluctuation time, but no. 2 * -No. As an example, the background pattern fluctuation pattern of 8 * is high-speed fluctuation in the first 5 seconds (for example, the left, middle and right background patterns are high-speed fluctuation respectively), and after 5 seconds, for example, the left and right background symbols are aligned and stopped. The variation pattern is such that a reach effect is performed in the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, No. 2-No. When using the background symbol variation pattern of the eight background symbol variation patterns, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops, for example, the left and right background symbols together when the normal variation is completed. No. 2-No. The background symbol variation pattern of the background symbol variation pattern 8 is a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed.

  The background symbol variation pattern No. 1 is a fluctuation pattern in which the background symbol normally fluctuates (fluctuation without a reach mode). In addition, the background design variation pattern No. Reference numeral 9 denotes a variation pattern in which the background symbol is shortened (a variation in which the displayed background symbol changes in a short time compared to the normal variation). In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 reduces the variation pattern of the shortened variation (the first variation pattern # 8 or the first variation pattern # 8 or the like) if the value of the total number of pending storages is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more. The second variation pattern # 8) is selected. Therefore, if the value of the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 4), the effect control microcomputer 100 is a background that is a shortened variation based on the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560. Symbol variation pattern No. Nine aspects will be used. Further, if the value of the total number of pending storages is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the background symbol variation pattern No., which is a normal variation, based on the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560. One embodiment will be used.

  In addition, the variation pattern that is “reach variation” is a variation pattern that displays the reach mode before the variation time has elapsed. Specifically, a background symbol variation pattern in which “*” is not added to the background symbol variation pattern name is selected in the background symbol variation pattern selected when the variation of the background symbol is started (the processing in step S921). Background symbol variation pattern No. 1), the background symbol variation pattern selected at the switching timing when the background symbol variation to be described later is not switched (the background symbol variation pattern No. selected in the processing of steps S969 and S959) .2, No. 4, No. 6), and background symbol variation is switched, but is selected when the variation time after switching (total variation time from variation start to variation end) is 10 seconds. The background symbol variation pattern (background symbol variation pattern No. 1 selected in the process of step S641). The background symbol variation pattern with “*” added to the background symbol variation pattern name is selected as the background symbol variation pattern after the switching when the background symbol variation is switched (in step S983). The background symbol variation patterns No. 2 * to No. 7 * selected in the process and No. 4 *, No. 6 *, No. 8 * selected in the process of Step S642 are used.

  The type of variable display time (change time) shown in FIG. 15 is different from the type of change time shown in FIG. The difference is that, in principle, the variable display of the background symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol (meaning that the variable display time is the same), but the variable display period of the first special symbol is When the variable display period of the second special symbol partially overlaps, the background symbol variation time does not match the first special symbol variation time nor the second special symbol variation time. It is. For example, the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds, the variation time of the second special symbol is 20 seconds, and the variable display period of the first special symbol overlaps the variable display period of the second special symbol for 5 seconds. In this case, when the background symbol variable display and the special symbol variable display are synchronized, the background symbol variation time is 25 seconds.

  When the variable display period of the first special symbol and the variable display period of the second special symbol do not overlap, the background symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is the background symbol shown in FIG. It is realized by a combination of two of the variation patterns (one is No. 1 (No. 9 in the case of a shortened variation)). For example, when the variation time (variable display time) of the special symbol is 20 seconds, No. 1 and no. 2 is used.

  Next, the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process will be described. 16 to 18 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol normal process. In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) can start changing the first special symbol (for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is set in step S300). (Step S1501), the value of the first start winning memorized number (first reserved memorized number) is confirmed (step S1502). Specifically, the count value of the first start winning memory counter is confirmed. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 means that the first decorative symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9 and the small hit control is not performed. This is the case when the game is not a big hit game.

  If it is not possible to start changing the first special symbol in step S1501, or if the first reserved memory number is 0 in step S1502, the game control microcomputer 560 starts changing the second special symbol. (For example, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating processing corresponding to step S300) (step S1501a), and the second start winning memory number The value of (second pending storage number) is confirmed (step S1502a). Specifically, the count value of the second start winning memory counter is confirmed. Note that when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating processing corresponding to step S300, the second decorative symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9, and the small hit control is also performed. This is the case when the game is not a big hit game.

  If the second special symbol cannot be changed and the second reserved memory number is 0, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the demonstration display flag is set. (Step S1503). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration is being executed. If it is set, the first special symbol normal process is terminated. If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a demonstration display flag (step S1504), and transmits a demonstration display command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1505).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0 in step S1502, each random number value (each determination random number or display design random number) stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 is read and the random number in the RAM 55 is read. The contents are stored in the buffer area (step S1506), the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S1507), and the value of the first reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the value of the first start winning storage counter is decreased by 1). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. . Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. In other words, in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a process of shifting the contents of each storage area each time a variable display start condition is satisfied.

  Note that, based on the update of the value of the first start winning memory counter in step S1507 (the value of the predetermined work area provided in the RAM is updated), the game control microcomputer 560 performs the effect symbol command control process. In (step S29), a first effect storage information designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits the first effect storage information 0 designation command when the updated number of reserved memories is 0, and when the updated number of reserved memories is 1, 1 effect storage information 1 designation command is transmitted, and when the number of reserved storage after update is 2, the first effect storage information 2 designation command is transmitted, and when the number of reserved storage after update is 3, 1 effect storage information 3 designation command is transmitted.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the display state of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a according to the changed value of the first reserved memory number counter (step S1507a). That is, the first reserved memory number displayed on the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is set to a number corresponding to the changed value.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step S1507b). If the second big hit flag is set, it is determined that the display result of the first special symbol display 8a is not forced, and the process proceeds to step S1516. That is, since it has already been determined that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform the big hit determination process of steps S1509 and S1510, and it is unconditional as it is. 1 It is determined that the display result of the special symbol display 8a is to be an off symbol.

  Note that the second big hit flag is set when it is determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol process. Further, the second big hit flag is reset when, for example, the variation of the second special symbol is finished (or is reset when the big hit game is finished). That is, the fact that the second jackpot flag is set means that it has been determined that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol. Therefore, the fact that the second jackpot flag is set means that the second special symbol display 8b changes the second special symbol based on the fact that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b is determined to be the jackpot symbol. Is being executed (however, if it is reset when the jackpot game is over, it means that a variation is being executed or that a jackpot game is being executed).

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is already determined that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b is to be a big hit symbol, the first special symbol indicator is not performed by performing the big hit determination processing in steps S1509 and S1510. Although the case where the display result of 8a is forcibly disregarded will be described, forcible disengagement may be performed using other methods. For example, if the second jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a jackpot determination module described later using a value that forcibly loses as the jackpot determination random number (see step S1509). Thus, the display result of the first special symbol display 8a may be forcibly disregarded. Further, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the jackpot determination process (steps S1509 and S1510) and determines that the display result of the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot, the second jackpot flag is set. If it is, control may be performed so that the determination result of the big hit is invalid and the force is disengaged.

  If the second jackpot flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a jackpot determination process (steps S1508 to S1511) for determining whether or not to win. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S1508), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1509). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may use a software random number or a hardware random number output from the random number circuit as the big hit determination random number used for the big hit determination.

  If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit flag (step S1511). The big hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been decided to make a big hit.

  If it is decided not to make a big hit (N in step S1510), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination process (steps S1512 to S1515) for determining whether or not to make a small hit. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the big hit determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S1512), and executes the small hit determination module (step S1513). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when the big hit determination random number matches a predetermined small hit determination value. In this embodiment, a case where a common jackpot determination random number is used for the case of determining whether to win or not and a case of determining whether to win or not will be described. The microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to make a small hit by using a small random number for determination only for small hits (random number for small hit determination).

  When it is determined to be a small hit (step S1514), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag (step S1515). It should be noted that the small hit flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined to be a small hit.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol information setting process (steps S1516 to S1541) for setting the big hit symbol, the big hit type, and the small hit symbol. The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1516). If the jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special symbol stop symbol when the jackpot is determined and loads a jackpot symbol setting table for determining the type of jackpot (step) S1517). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 reads from the random number storage buffer the jackpot symbol random number for determining the stop symbol and the jackpot type of the first special symbol when the jackpot is determined (step S1518). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol and jackpot type of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol setting table and the jackpot symbol random number (step S1519).

  FIG. 19A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol setting table. As shown in FIG. 19A, the jackpot symbol setting table includes a random number value of the jackpot symbol random number, a special symbol stop symbol, and a jackpot type in association with each other. In step S1519, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol according to the setting content shown in FIG. 19A according to the random number value of the jackpot symbol random number. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the type of the big hit, either normal big hit, probability variation big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit according to the setting contents shown in FIG. 19A according to the random number value of the big hit symbol random number. To do. Furthermore, in the case of a 15-round probability variation big hit other than the sudden probability variation big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect has been executed or whether the re-lottery effect has been executed according to the setting contents shown in FIG. Determine the execution timing (during round, ending, or both round and ending). When determining the stop symbol of the first special symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the stop symbol is “0” if the random number value of the jackpot determination random number is “0” to “9”, for example. If the random value is “10” to “19”, the stop symbol is determined as “1”, and if the random number is “20” to “29”, the stop symbol is determined as “2”. If “30” to “39”, the stop symbol is determined as “3”, and if the random number value is “40” to “49”, the stop symbol is determined as “4”.

  In addition, when determining whether to stop the first special symbol, the type of jackpot, whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect, determine whether to stop the second special symbol, the type of jackpot, whether to execute the re-lottery effect, etc. Sometimes, different jackpot symbol random numbers may be used. Then, using the different jackpot symbol setting tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the jackpot symbol setting table in which different random numbers are assigned to each), the execution of the stop symbol, the type of jackpot, and the re-lottery effect It may be determined whether or not there is.

  In order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol, the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b may be configured to variably display two-digit numbers such as “0” to “99”. In this case, for example, in the jackpot symbol setting table, if the random number value is 0 to 49, the special symbol stop symbols “0” to “49”, and if the random value is 50 to 69, the stop symbol “50” to If the random number value is 70 to 79, the stop symbol “70” to “79” is displayed. If the random value is 80 to 89, the stop symbol “80” to “89” is displayed. If it is 99, stop symbols “90” to “99” may be included in association with each other.

  If the determined big hit type is not a probable big hit (N in Step S1520), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the decided big hit type is a sudden probable big hit (Step S1521). If it is a sudden probability variation big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a sudden probability variation big hit flag indicating that it has been determined that the sudden probability variation big hit is set (step S1522), and an effect designation value indicating the sudden probability variation big hit. Is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1523). If it is not suddenly probable big hit, an effect designation value indicating a normal big hit is set in the effect symbol information buffer (step S1524).

  If the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (Y in step S1520), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probability variation jackpot flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been determined (step S1525). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect (step S1526). The designated value is set in the first effect symbol information buffer (step S1527).

  When performing the re-lottery effect, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is in the big hit game round (step S1528). If the big hit game is in a round, the game control microcomputer 560 indicates the execution of the re-drawing effect during the round and sets an effect designation value indicating a probable big hit in the first effect symbol information buffer (step S1529). In addition, a re-lottery flag during round indicating that the re-lottery effect during round is executed is set (step S1530).

  If it is not in the big hit game round in step S1530, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is in the ending after the big hit game ends (step S1531). If it is during the ending after the end of the big hit game, the game control microcomputer 560 indicates the execution of the re-lottery effect after the big hit and sets the specified effect value indicating the probable big hit in the first effect symbol information buffer (step S1532). . In addition, a big lottery re-lottery flag indicating that the big lottery re-lottery effect is executed is set (step S1533).

  If the ending after the big hit game is not ended in step S1533, the game control microcomputer 560 shows the execution of both the re-lottery effect during the round and the re-lottery effect after the big hit, and shows an effect designation value indicating the probability variation big hit as the first effect. The symbol information buffer is set (step S1534). Further, a re-lottery flag indicating that both the re-lottery effect during the round and the post-hit re-lottery effect are executed is set (step S1535).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S1516, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S1536). If the small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the small hit symbol setting table for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as the small hit (step S1537). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 reads from the random number storage buffer a random number for the small hit symbol for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined as the small hit (step S1538). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol based on the small hit symbol setting table and the random symbol for the small hit symbol (step S1539). Then, the effect designation value indicating the small hit is set in the first effect symbol information buffer (step S1540).

  FIG. 19B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit symbol setting table. As shown in FIG. 19B, the small hit design setting table includes a random number value of the small hit design random number and a special design stop symbol in association with each other. In step S1539, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol as “9” according to the setting content shown in FIG. Note that the same symbol as the stop symbol of the special symbol for probability variation big hit may be determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol for small hit.

  If the small hit flag is not set in step S1536, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an effect designation value indicating a loss in the first effect symbol information buffer (step S1541).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1542). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether a high probability flag and a high base flag, which will be described later, are set, and if both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set, the high probability state background A designation command (command 9501 (H) shown in FIG. 12) is transmitted, and if only the high probability flag is set, a sudden change state background designation command (command 9502 (H) shown in FIG. 12) is transmitted. If neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, a normal state background designation command (command 9500 (H) shown in FIG. 12) is transmitted. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value indicating the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S1543).

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined collectively using the jackpot symbol setting table and the jackpot symbol random number in step S1519 has been described, but the jackpot type is determined using separate random numbers. It may be determined separately. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to make a probability change using a probability variation determination random number, and whether to suddenly change the probability using a probability variation determination random number separately from the probability variation determination random number. May be determined. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect using the re-lottery effect determining random number.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S201). If the big hit flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S202). If the small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 decides to use the small hit variation pattern (variation pattern in which the EXT data shown in FIG. 14 is “08 (H)”).

  If the small hit flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 calculates the total number of reserved memories by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (step S203A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 adds the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter to calculate the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the calculated total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example) (step S203B). When the total pending storage number is 4 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a first variation pattern having a variation time of 5 seconds (that is, a variation time of shortened variation) (step S203C), and step The process proceeds to S207.

  Note that the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined also when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state or the high base state. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first variation pattern (first variation pattern # shown in FIG. 14) having a variation time of 5 seconds based on the setting of the time reduction flag and the high base flag. 10) may be determined. Further, for example, separately from the first variation pattern # 10 for shortening variation, a variation pattern for time reduction (or for high base) is prepared in advance, and based on the fact that the time reduction flag and the high base flag are set, The first fluctuation pattern for time reduction (or for high base) may be determined.

  When the first jackpot flag is set in step S201, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to use the first jackpot variation pattern determination table (step S204). On the other hand, if the total pending storage number is not 4 or more in step S203B, the game control microcomputer 560 determines to use the first deviation variation pattern determination table (step S205).

  In the first big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“04 (H)” to “07 (H)”) selected in advance for the big hit shown in FIG. 14 are set, and a plurality of variation patterns are set for each variation pattern. The judgment value is assigned. In addition, in the first deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (“00 (H)” to “03 (H)”) selected in advance in the case of deviation shown in FIG. 14 are set in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer and, based on the read variation pattern determination random number, the first big hit variation pattern determination table or the first deviation variation pattern determination table. Is used to determine the variation pattern of the first decorative design (step S206). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern executed by the variable display device 9. If it is determined that a sudden probability change big hit is included in the big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the fluctuation pattern for the sudden probability change big hit (the EXT data shown in FIG. 14 is “07 (H)”). (Variation pattern) is used. In addition, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is, the game control microcomputer 550 uses any variation pattern of EXT data “04 (H)” to “06 (H)”. decide. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is usually made, the game control microcomputer 560 uses any variation pattern of the EXT data from “04 (H)” to “06 (H)”. decide. In this embodiment, even when it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the round and the re-lottery effect after the big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 has the EXT data for both the probability variable big hit / normal big hit as “ 04 (H) ”to“ 06 (H) ”is used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first variation pattern designation value corresponding to the determined variation pattern (variation time) in the first effect symbol variation pattern buffer (step S207). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first address of the first command transmission table in the first pointer (step S208). The game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern designation value in the first effect symbol variation pattern buffer in step S207, and sets the first address of the first command transmission table in the first pointer in step S208. In the effect symbol command control process described later, first, the first variation pattern command is transmitted based on the variation pattern designation value set in the first effect symbol variation pattern buffer corresponding to the first address of the first command transmission table. . Then, in the effect symbol command control process, by adding one address indicating the first command transmission table one by one, according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG. Command transmission is performed every 2 ms in the order of the result command and the first effect storage information command. In this embodiment, the first control pattern command, the first display result command, and the first effect storage information command are transmitted every 2 ms, so that the effect control microcomputer 100 fails to receive the command. It is hard to generate.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the first special symbol process timer (step S209). Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S302 (step S210).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S302) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the first special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the first special symbol process timer is up (that is, whether or not the value of the first special symbol process timer is 0), and if it is not up (in step S352) N) The first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is. If the first special symbol process timer has timed up (Y in step S352), if the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag is set, the first big hit symbol display time timer will display the big hit symbol. A value corresponding to the display time is set (steps S353 and S254), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big hit symbol stop process (step S355). If the first big hit flag is not set, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first off symbol stop process (step S356).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first off symbol stop process (step S303) in the first special symbol process. In the first missed symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets, for example, an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S35 to end the variation of the first special symbol, and displays the first special symbol display. The device 8a is controlled to derive and display the shifted symbol (step S161). In addition, control is performed to transmit a first design symbol stop designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S162). In this embodiment, the case where the first decoration symbol stop designation command is transmitted after the first special symbol has been derived and displayed is shown. However, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the first decoration symbol stop designation. After the command is transmitted (see step S162), the off symbol of the first special symbol may be derived and displayed (see step S161). In step S170, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300).

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the first big hit symbol stop process (step S304) in the first special symbol process. In the first big hit symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the first big hit symbol display time timer by -1 when the control for transmitting the first decorative symbol stop designation command has already been executed. When the big hit symbol display time timer has timed out (= 0), the process proceeds to step S1306 (steps S1301, S1304, S1305).

  When the control for transmitting the first design symbol stop designation command is not executed (step S1301), the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S35 is set to end the variation of the first special symbol. Then, control for deriving and displaying the big hit symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed (step S1302). In addition, control for transmitting the first decorative symbol stop designation command (8F00 (H)) is performed to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1303). Then, control goes to a step S1304.

  In this embodiment, the case where the first decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted after the big special symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed is shown. However, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the first decorative symbol stop designation. After sending the command (see step S1303), the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol may be derived and displayed (see step S1302).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step S1306). If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step S1306), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (step S1307). If it is set, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the sudden probability variation big hit symbol on the big prize opening control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening, and then suddenly changes the big winning game. Is set (step S1308) to execute an effect (fanfare effect) for informing the player that the game is started (sudden probability change big hit display time (for example, 5 seconds)). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a sudden probability change big hit start designation command (third fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1309). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  If the sudden change bonus game flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the jackpot symbol on the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot and then hits the jackpot symbol. An execution time (big hit display time (for example, 3 seconds)) of the effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the game is started is set (step S1310). It should be noted that the same display time may be set for a normal big hit (15 round big hit) and a sudden probability variation big hit (2 round big hit).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1311). If not set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a normal jackpot start designation command (first fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1312). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-lottery flag is set during the round (step S1313). If set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a big hit start designation command (fourth fanfare designation command) with re-lottery during the round to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1314). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  If the re-lottery flag during the round is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the post-hit re-lottery flag is set (step S1315). If set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a jackpot start designation command (fifth fanfare designation command) with re-lottery after the jackpot ends to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1316). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  If the big lottery re-lottery flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-lottery flag is set (step S1317). If set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a jackpot start designation command with re-lottery (sixth fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1318). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  If the re-lottery flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a probability variation big hit start designation command (second fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1319). Then, control goes to a step S1320.

  In step S1317, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the probability variation flag and the high base flag (step S1320). Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (step S1321).

  If the first big hit flag is not set in step S1303, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S1319). If not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (step S1323).

  If the first small hit flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the small hit display time in the big prize opening control timer for measuring the time for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening. (Step S1322). In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the same time as the sudden probability change big hit display time (for example, 5 seconds) in the big winning opening control timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a small hitting start designation command (seventh fanfare designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1323). Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (step S1324).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) in the first special symbol process. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S402), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), it is confirmed whether or not the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (step S403).

  If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set (N in Step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big prize for setting the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening at the time of the chance big hit or the normal big hit. The address of the mouth opening setting table (for normal use) is set in the pointer (step S404). If the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 will release the big prize opening for setting the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening at the time of the sudden probability change big hit. The address of the setting table (for sudden change in probability) is set in the pointer (step S405).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the maximum time (round time) in which the big winning opening can be opened in each round in the big win in the big winning opening control timer (step S406). In this case, when the probability variation jackpot flag is not suddenly set, the round time (round time for 15 rounds) of the address of the special winning opening opening setting table (for normal use) pointed to by the pointer set in step S404 is set. To do. The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. If the sudden probability change big hit flag is set, the round time of the address in the big winning opening opening setting table (for sudden probability change) pointed to by the pointer set in step S405 (two round land for sudden probability change big hit) Time). The round time for two rounds is, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sends a display command (A1XX (H)) during the big prize opening to specify the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during the round). Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S407). The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S408) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S409). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port in step S408. The content related to OFF is set according to the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area of the output port in the solenoid output process of step S33 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (step S410).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening opening process (step S306) in the first special symbol process. In the first grand prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first confirms whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step S421). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S421), the process proceeds to step S424. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S421), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S422). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S423). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in Step S423), the process proceeds to Step S424.

  In step S424, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S425). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S425), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the winning prize counter has reached a predetermined number (Y in step S423) or when the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S425), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, it is confirmed whether or not the sudden probability big hit flag is set (step S426).

  If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set (N in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 waits for the time (interval) from the end of the round in the probability big hit or the normal big hit until the next round starts. The address of the time table (for normal use) after opening the big prize opening for setting (time) is set in the pointer (step S427). If the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 calculates the time (interval time) from the end of the round at the sudden probability big hit to the start of the next round. The address of the table after opening the special winning opening for setting (for sudden probability change) is set in the pointer (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time) in the big prize opening control timer (step S429). In this case, if the sudden probability big hit flag is not set suddenly, the interval time (15-round interval time) of the address in the setting table (for normal use) after the big winning opening is indicated by the pointer set in step S427. set. The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds. When the sudden probability change big hit flag is set, the interval time (two rounds for sudden probability change big hit) of the address in the setting table for sudden winning opening (for sudden probability change) pointed to by the pointer set in step S428. Set the interval time. Note that the interval time for two rounds is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 effects the display designation command (A2XX (H)) after the big prize opening that designates the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round). Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S430). In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control for driving the solenoid 21 to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S431). Also, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S432). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (first first prize opening opening post-processing) (step S433).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening opening post-processing (step S307) in the first special symbol process. In the first big winning opening opening post-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S441). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set (step S443). If the sudden probability big hit flag is not set (N in Step S443), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached 15 (Step S444). If the probability variation big hit flag is set suddenly, it is checked whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached 2 (step S445).

  If the value of the round number counter has not reached 15 in step S444 (N in step S444) or if the value of the round number counter has not reached 2 in step S445 (N in step S445), the first special symbol The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (first big prize opening pre-processing) (step S446), and the process is terminated.

  When the value of the round number counter is 15 in step S444 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-lottery flag during round is set (step S447). If it is set, a big hit end designation command (fourth ending designation command) with a re-lottery during the round is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S448).

  If the re-lottery flag during the round is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big lottery re-lottery flag is set (step S449). If set, a jackpot end designation command (fifth ending designation command) with re-lottery after the jackpot ends is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S450).

  If the big hit promotion flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-lottery flag is set (step S451). If set, a jackpot end designation command with a re-lottery (sixth ending designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S452).

  If the re-lottery flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S453). If it is set, a probability variation big hit end designation command (second ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S454). If not set, a normal jackpot end designation command (first ending designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S455).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 in step S445 (Y in step S445), the game control microcomputer 560 displays an ending 3 command (A302 (A302 ( H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S456).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets an execution time (big hit end time) of an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the big hit in the big prize opening control timer (step S457), and the first special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (first big hit end process) (step S458). In step S457, when the game control microcomputer 560 has decided to execute the re-lottery effect in the ending effect after the end of the big hit, it is compared with the case where it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect. Long execution time is set as jackpot end time. For example, when the re-lottering effect is not executed, the jackpot end time (10 seconds) is set. When it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed, the big hit end time (20 seconds) may be set. By doing so, it is possible to secure an execution period for executing the re-lottery effect in the ending effect after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S308) in the first special symbol process. In the first jackpot ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S461). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S462). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S462), the process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S462), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S463). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set (Y in step S463), a high probability flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state is set (step S464) and a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state is set. Set (step S465). In other words, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probable change state, the transition to the high probability state where the probability that the special symbol stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol after the jackpot game ends is improved from the normal state. At the same time, the game is shifted to a high base state in which the ease of winning a game ball to the start winning opening 14 is improved from the normal state.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly checks whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S466). If set, a high probability flag is set (step S467). That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is suddenly changed to the probabilistic change state, the state is changed only to the high probability state and not changed to the high base state (the first high probability state described above). Note that even if the game state suddenly shifts to the probability change state, the game state may shift to the high probability state and may shift to the high base state. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the high probability flag and also sets the high base flag in step S467. If the sudden probability change big hit flag is set and the sudden probability change big hit flag is set when the state has already been shifted to the high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the high base flag in step S467, You may make it transfer to a base state. In addition, only when it is suddenly determined that the probability change big hit is already in the high base state, the high base flag is set in step S467 and the high base state counter for counting the number of times the high base state is continued. A predetermined count value (for example, 50 times) may be set in. Then, the high base state may be continued until the variation display of special symbols for the number of times indicated by the count value set in the high base number counter is executed.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the first big hit flag (step S468). If the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S469). If the re-lottery flag during round, the re-lottery flag after big hit, and the re-lottery flag are set, the re-lottery flag during round, the big lottery re-lottery flag, and the re-lottery flag are reset (step S470).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (the value of the first special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (first special symbol normal process) (step S471).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first small hit release pre-processing (step S309) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hit pre-opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the opening time of the small winning opening for setting the opening time of the big winning opening at the small winning. Is set in the pointer (step S1403).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the opening time of the big winning opening in the small hitting in the big winning opening control timer (step S1404). In this case, the address release time of the small hit release setting table pointed to by the pointer set in step S1403 is set. The opening time for small hits is, for example, 0.1 seconds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S1405), and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S1406). Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (first small hit opening process) (step S1407).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first small hit opening process (step S310) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hit opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first confirms whether or not a game ball has been won at the big winning opening by confirming whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on ( Step S1421). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S1421), the process proceeds to step S1424. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S1421), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S1422). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1423). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in Step S1423), the process proceeds to Step S1424.

  In step S1424, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1425), and when the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (step S1425). N) The process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the winning number counter reaches the predetermined number (Y in step S1423) or when the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1425), the game control microcomputer 560 Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached 2 (step S1426).

  If the value of the round number counter has not reached 2, the address of the table after the small hit release is set to set the time (interval time) from the end of the round at the small hit to the start of the next round (interval time). The pointer is set (step S1427). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big winning opening control timer (step S1428). Note that the interval time for two rounds is an extremely short time, for example, 0.1 seconds. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S1429). Also, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S1430). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (first small hit pre-processing) (step S1431).

  If the value of the round number counter has reached 2, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 and close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S1432). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S1433).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small win end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S1434), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag in accordance with step S311 (first small hit end processing). The value is updated (step S1435).

  In this embodiment, the case where the opening and closing of the big prize opening is controlled based on the number of rounds in the small hit is shown. However, the control method of the big winning opening at the small hit is shown in this embodiment. It is not limited to things. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the data indicating the opening time and closing time of the big winning opening at the time of a small hit, and sets the big winning opening at the small hit based on the data indicating the set opening time and closing time. You may control. In this case, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 performs two rounds of small hit, in the first small hit release pre-processing, in step S1404 the first big winning opening release time (for example, 0.1 Second) is set in the first control timer. Also, the closing time (for example, 0.1 second) of the special winning opening after the opening of the first special winning opening is completed is set in the second control timer. Also, the opening time (for example, 0.1 second) of the second big prize opening is set in the third control timer. In the first small hit release process (see step S310), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the first control timer by 1, and drives the solenoid if the first control timer is up. Close the big prize opening (in this case, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not updated). Next, the second control timer is decremented by 1 in the first small hit opening process, and if the second control timer has timed out, the solenoid is driven to open the big prize opening (in this case also, (The special symbol process flag value is not updated.) Further, the third control timer is decremented by 1 in the first small hit opening process, and if the third control timer has timed out, the solenoid is driven to close the big prize opening. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit end processing (see step S1435).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first small hit end process (step S311) in the first special symbol process. In the first small hitting end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by −1 (step S1451). Note that the value of the special winning opening control timer is set in the process of step S1428 in the first small hit opening process. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S1452). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1452), the process is terminated.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1452), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the first small hit flag (step S1453). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (the value of the first special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (first special symbol normal process) (step S1454).

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol command control process. In the effect symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not there is an effect control command to be transmitted in the first command transmission table (step S331a). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an effect control command is set at the address of the first command transmission table pointed to by the first pointer. Otherwise, the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to step S331b. If there is an effect control command to be transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the command data of the first command transmission table pointed to by the first pointer (step S332a).

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a command transmission table. FIG. 34A is a first command transmission table used for transmitting the first variation pattern command, the first display result command, and the first effect storage information command. FIG. 34B is a second command transmission table used for transmitting the second variation pattern command, the second display result command, and the second effect storage information command. As shown in FIG. 34A, the first command transmission table includes MODE data of the first variation pattern command, EXT data of the first variation pattern command, MODE data of the first display result command, and the first display result command. EXT data, MODE data of the first effect storage information command, EXT data of the first effect storage information command, and an end code. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect symbol command control process is executed according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG. 34A, whereby the first variation pattern command, the first display result command, and the first effect storage information. Commands are sent in the order of commands. Further, as shown in FIG. 34B, the second command transmission table includes MODE data of the second variation pattern command, EXT data of the second variation pattern command, MODE data of the second display result command, and second display. The result command EXT data, the second effect storage information command MODE data, the second effect storage information command EXT data, and the end code are set in this order. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect symbol command control process is executed according to the second command transmission table shown in FIG. 34B, whereby the second variation pattern command, the second display result command, and the second effect storage information. Commands are sent in the order of commands.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 1 (step S333a). Here, first, MODE data of the first variation pattern command is transmitted according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value indicating the first command transmission table (step S334a). Therefore, the command data 2 area of the second byte is designated. The game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the command data 2 at the address of the first command transmission table pointed to by the first pointer (step S335a). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 saves the address of the first command transmission table (the contents of the pointer as the transmission signal instruction means) to the stack or the like (step S336a).

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 7 (work area reference bit) of the command data 2 is “0” (step S337a). If not 0, the head address of the first command extended data address table is set in the first pointer (step S338a), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the first pointer. (Step S339a). Then, the data of the area pointed to by the address is loaded (step S340a).

  In the first command extended data address table, EXT data that can be sent to the electrical component control means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100) is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the first command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the first command extended data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 2 (step S341a). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the first command transmission table (step S342a), and adds 1 to the value indicating the first command transmission table (step S343a).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not there is an effect control command to be transmitted in the second command transmission table (step S331b). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an effect control command is set at the address of the second command transmission table pointed to by the second pointer. If not, the game control microcomputer 560 ends the process. If there is an effect control command to be transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the command data of the second command transmission table pointed to by the second pointer (step S332b).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 1 (step S333b). Here, first, MODE data of the second variation pattern command is transmitted according to the second command transmission table shown in FIG.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the value indicating the second command transmission table (step S334b). Therefore, the command data 2 area of the second byte is designated. The game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the command data 2 at the address of the second command transmission table pointed to by the second pointer (step S335b). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 saves the address of the second command transmission table (the contents of the pointer as the transmission signal instruction means) to the stack or the like (step S336b).

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not the value of bit 7 (work area reference bit) of the command data 2 is “0” (step S337b). If not 0, the head address of the second command extended data address table is set in the second pointer (step S338b), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the second pointer. (Step S339b). Then, the data of the area indicated by the address is loaded (step S340b).

  In the second command extended data address table, EXT data that can be sent to the electrical component control means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100) is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the second command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the second command extended data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes command transmission processing for transmitting the loaded command data 2 (step S341b). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the second command transmission table (step S342b), and adds 1 to the value indicating the second command transmission table (step S343b).

  In this embodiment, in the first variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern designation value is set in the first effect symbol variation pattern buffer in step S207, and the start address of the first command transmission table is set in the first pointer in step S208. Is done. Then, in the effect symbol command control process, based on the fact that the first address of the first command transmission table is set to the first pointer, first, the first effect symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first address of the first command transmission table A first variation pattern command is transmitted in accordance with the variation pattern designation value set in the buffer. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol normal process, the effect designation value is set in the first effect symbol information buffer in steps S1523, S1524, S1527, S1529, S1532, S1534, S1540, and S1541. In addition, by sending the first variation pattern command in the effect symbol command control process, the address indicating the first command transmission table is incremented by 1 (see steps S334a and S343a), and the first variation pattern command is transmitted. At the next timer interrupt, the first display result command is transmitted by the effect designation value set in the first effect symbol information buffer corresponding to the address of the first command transmission table. In this embodiment, when it is determined in the first special symbol normal process that the first special symbol can be changed (see step S1501), the value of the first start winning memory counter is decremented by one. (See step S1507). Then, in the effect symbol command control processing, the address indicating the first command transmission table is incremented by 1 by transmitting the first display result command (see steps S334 and S343), and the next variation pattern command is transmitted. With the timer interruption, the first effect storage information command is transmitted according to the value of the first start winning storage counter corresponding to the address of the first command transmission table. Through the above processing, the first variation pattern command, the first display result command, and the first effect storage information command are transmitted in this order in accordance with the first command transmission table shown in FIG. In addition, since the process (refer step S1542) which transmits a background designation | designated command in a 1st special symbol normal process is performed, the microcomputer 560 for game control performs a background designation | designated command when performing the variable display of a 1st special symbol. The commands are transmitted in the order of the first variation pattern command, the first display result command, and the first effect storage information command.

  In this embodiment, in the second variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern designation value is set in the second effect symbol variation pattern buffer by the same processing as in step S207, and the second command transmission table in the second command transmission table by the same processing as in step S208. The start address is set in the second pointer. Then, based on the fact that the start address of the second command transmission table is set in the second pointer in the effect symbol command control process, first, the second effect symbol variation pattern corresponding to the start address of the second command transmission table. A second variation pattern command is transmitted according to the variation pattern designation value set in the buffer. In this embodiment, in the second special symbol normal process, the effect designation value is set in the second effect symbol information buffer in the same process as steps S1523, S1524, S1527, S1529, S1532, S1534, S1540, and S1541. The In addition, by sending the second variation pattern command in the effect symbol command control process, the address indicating the second command transmission table is incremented by 1 (see steps S334a and S343a), and the second variation pattern command is transmitted. At the next timer interrupt, the second display result command is transmitted by the effect designation value set in the second effect symbol information buffer corresponding to the address of the second command transmission table. Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined in the second special symbol normal process that the second special symbol can be changed (see step S1501), the value of the second start winning memory counter is decremented by one. (See step S1507). Then, in the effect symbol command control process, the address indicating the second command transmission table is incremented by 1 by transmitting the second display result command (see steps S334 and S343), and the next variation pattern command is transmitted. With the timer interruption, the second effect storage information command is transmitted according to the value of the second start winning storage counter corresponding to the address of the second command transmission table. Through the above processing, the second variation pattern command, the second display result command, and the second effect storage information command are transmitted in this order in accordance with the second command transmission table shown in FIG. In addition, since the process (process equivalent to step S1542) which transmits a background designation | designated command in a 2nd special symbol normal process is performed, the microcomputer 560 for game control performs the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol. The commands are transmitted in the order of the background designation command, the second variation pattern command, the second display result command, and the second effect storage information command.

  In this embodiment, the case where the background display command, the variation pattern command, the display result command, and the effect storage information command are transmitted in this order is shown. Not limited. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit the display result command after transmitting the effect storage information command. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 does not matter the transmission order such as transmitting the variation pattern command and the display result command after transmitting the effect storage information command.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 performs production content determination processing (step S704a). In the effect content determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) to determine whether or not to perform the notice effect. , Type of notice effect).

  Note that the “notice effect” is to notify the player in advance (before the decorative symbols and background symbols are stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9) that the game is a big hit or may be a big hit. The production of. For example, the player is informed that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing a different mode (speed, direction of rotation, etc.) or making a character appear during the change.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the processing corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first decorative symbol display unit 9a is executed. To do. Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process, the processing corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second decorative symbol display unit 9b is executed. To do. Further, background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). Further, a random number for determining a display symbol to be displayed on the variable display device 9 and a random symbol for determining a display symbol to be shifted from the left middle right background symbol, and a jackpot symbol to be displayed on the variable display device 9 are determined. A random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot display symbol determination random number, a notice determination random number, or the like is performed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 11 to 13) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the main processing. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer in the command reception process executed by the INT interrupt. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a command reception flag indicating that the effect control command has been received (step S1612), and receives the reception command from the command reception buffer. Read (step S1613).

  When the effect control command received by the command reception process executed by the INT interrupt is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the received command is an effect control command existing in the program. You may make it confirm whether or not. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the MODE data of the first byte of the received command exists in the program such as “80”, “8C”, “A0” (FIGS. 11 to 11). 13), if the MODE data does not exist in the program, it may be determined that the effect control command has not been correctly received due to a garbled data or the like, and the received command may be discarded. Further, even if the MODE data exists in the program, it is confirmed whether the second byte of EXT data exists in the program with respect to the MODE data (see FIGS. 11 to 13). If the EXT data does not exist, it may be determined that the effect control command has not been correctly received due to a cause such as garbled data, and the received command may be discarded. In this case, the received command is not stored in the command reception buffer, and is processed in the command analysis process as if the effect control command has not been received.

  The received effect control command is an effect control command for specifying the first variation pattern (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8009 (H)) or an effect control command for specifying the second variation pattern (second variation pattern command: 8010 ( H) to 8019 (H)) (step S1614), the production control microcomputer 100 clears the display result stored in the RAM (step S1615). In this embodiment, as will be described later, in step S1619, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the display result indicated by the received first display result command or second display result command in the RAM. Then, after executing the variable display of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol, when the next variable pattern command is received, the display result stored in the RAM is cleared in step S1615.

  By doing as described above, the display result stored in the previous execution of the variation display can be surely cleared when the next variation display of the decorative design is performed. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, but when the display result command is not received correctly or when the display result command is not received at all, it is erroneous based on the display result stored in the previous variable display. A situation in which a display result (a display result corresponding to the previous variable display) is derived and displayed can be prevented. For example, if the display result command fails to be received after receiving the variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit, if the display result stored in the previous change remains, the display result stored in the previous time will be used. Incorrect display results may be derived and displayed. In this embodiment, since the previously stored display result is cleared at the timing when the variation pattern command is received, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an incorrect display result is derived and displayed based on the previously stored display result.

  For example, let us consider a case where the display result of the previous variation display of the decorative symbol is a probable big hit, and the display result of the current decorative symbol variation display is determined in advance as a normal big hit. In this case, if reception of the display result command (usually specified for big hit) fails after receiving a variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit, based on the display result of the probability variation big hit stored in the previous variation. As a result, the display result for the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, and an incorrect display result is derived and displayed. As described above, if the previously stored display result is cleared at the timing when the variation pattern command is received, a situation in which an incorrect display result is derived and displayed can be prevented.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 saves the variation pattern indicated by the received first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command (step S1616). Specifically, the EXT data of the command is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a first variation pattern reception flag indicating that the first variation pattern command has been received or a second variation pattern reception flag indicating that the second variation pattern command has been received ( Step S1617).

  If the received effect control command is the first display result command (command: 8C00 (H) to 8C07 (H)) or the second display result command (command: 8C10 (H) to 8C17 (H)) (step S1618). The production control microcomputer 100 saves the display result indicated by the received first display result command or second display result command (step S1619). Specifically, the EXT data of the command is stored in the display result data storage area in the RAM. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a first display result reception flag indicating that the first display result command has been received or a second display result reception flag indicating that the second display result command has been received ( Step S1620).

  If the received effect control command is a fanfare-designated effect control command (fanfare command: A0XX (H)) (step S1621), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command as fanfare data in the RAM. The data is stored in the storage area (step S1622), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S1623).

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the display result non-reception flag or the display result irregular reception flag is set (step S1624). The display result non-reception flag is a flag indicating that the display result command cannot be received within a predetermined time after receiving the variation pattern command. The display result irregular reception flag is a flag indicating that the display result command has been received but the display result command cannot be correctly received due to garbled data or the like.

  If neither the display result non-reception flag nor the display result irregular reception flag is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1611. If either the display result non-reception flag or the display result irregular reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probable big hit is specified by the fanfare command (step S1625). If specified, the re-lottery execution flag during round is set (step S1626), and the process proceeds to step S1611.

  If the received effect control command is an ending designation effect control command (ending command: A300 (H) to A305 (H)) (step S1628), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Is stored in the ending data storage area in the RAM (step S1629), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1630).

  If the received command read in step S1613 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1631). For example, when the received command is the first decorative symbol stop designation command (or the second decorative symbol stop designation command), the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the first decorative symbol stop designation command (or the second decorative symbol stop command). A first decorative symbol stop designation reception flag (or a second decorative symbol stop designation reception flag) indicating that the designation command) has been received is set.

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used in the effect control process. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to execute the notice effect (for determining the notice effect execution). In this embodiment, when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of the decorative pattern in the reach mode, the production control microcomputer 100, for example, when random 1 matches one predetermined value. Decides to perform a notice effect. It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to perform the notice effect using random 1 regardless of whether or not the variable display of the reach mode is performed.
(2) Random 2: When performing the notice effect, the type of the notice effect performed using the variable display device 9 is determined (for determining the notice effect type).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process (step S704a) shown in FIG. In the effect content determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the first variation pattern reception flag or the second variation pattern reception flag is set (step S2851).

  If the first variation pattern reception flag or the second variation pattern reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command based on the received first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command. 2 Specify the decorative pattern variation pattern. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variable display to be executed using the variable display device 9 is a fluctuation accompanied by reach based on the identified fluctuation pattern (step S2852). For example, when the variation pattern indicated in the received first variation pattern command or second variation pattern command is a pattern with reach (for example, the EXT data “01H” to “01H” shown in FIG. If the first variation pattern is “06H” or the second variation pattern is EXT data “11H” to “16H”), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation is accompanied by reach. . The production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is a big hit based on the received first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command, and determines that it is a fluctuation with reach if it is a big hit. May be. If neither the first fluctuation pattern reception flag nor the second fluctuation pattern reception flag is set in step S2851, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the process as it is.

  If it is determined that the variation is accompanied by reach, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the notice effect execution determination random number (random 1) (step S2853). For example, if the random 1 matches a predetermined value, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines to perform the notice effect using the variable display device 9. If it is determined in step S2852 that the change is not accompanied by reach, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the process.

  When it is determined that the notice effect is to be performed (step S2854), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the type of the notice effect to be performed using the variable display device 9, based on the notice effect type determination random number (random 2). (Step S2855). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 variably displays, based on Random 2, the speed at which the decorative symbol is changed and the rotation direction of the decorative symbol or the background symbol in the announcement effect. It is determined which character appears on the device 9. If it is determined in step S2854 that the notice effect is not to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the process.

  In this embodiment, in the effect content determination process, the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the case of determining the content of the notice effect have been described. However, it may be determined whether or not to change the effect mode. . For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect in different effect modes according to the type of the current game state. For example, according to whether or not the game state is a high base state, a game effect is performed in different effect modes. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using a predetermined effect change determination random number, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Is called. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines to change the effect mode when, for example, a predetermined effect change determination random number matches one predetermined value. Furthermore, when changing the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine which effect mode to change to by using a predetermined post-change effect determining random number.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol process (step S705A) in the main process shown in FIG. In the first decorative symbol process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S803 according to the value of the first effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. The second decorative symbol process (step S705B) is configured in the same manner as the first decorative symbol process, although the control target is the second decorative symbol display unit 9b.

  First variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not it has been confirmed that the first variation pattern designation effect control command (first variation pattern command) has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (first fluctuation pattern reception flag) indicating that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received is set. The first variation pattern reception flag is the first variation pattern command of any one of the first variation patterns designated (any of 8001 (H) to 8009 (H)) in the command analysis processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100. Set when it has been confirmed that it has been received. When the first variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern (such as the variation speed of the decorative symbol during the variation period) is selected from a plurality of types determined in advance according to each variation pattern. select. In addition, when one type of variation mode is determined in advance for each variation pattern, it is determined to use the variation mode according to the received variation pattern. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  First decorative symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the first decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802).

  First decorative symbol variation process (step S802): The end of the variation time determined according to the variation pattern is monitored. In addition, stop control of the first decorative design is performed. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol stop process (step S803).

  First decorative symbol stop process (step S803): Based on the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command, the first decorative symbol change is finally stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first variation pattern reception flag is set (whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received) (step S2831). If it has been received, the variation mode of the first decorative design is selected from a plurality of types determined in advance according to the variation pattern (step S2833).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received first variation pattern command is designated to be off (step S2834). If it is specified to be out, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random symbol for determining the off symbol (step S2835), and based on the value of the random symbol for determining the off symbol, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the off symbol is displayed. Determination is made (step S2836). Then, the determined stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is stored in the first decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the first decorative symbol determined flag indicating that the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is determined is set (step S2837).

  If the received first variation pattern command is not an outlier designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the sudden variation jackpot designation is abrupt (step S2844). If the sudden probability big hit is designated, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2847.

  If the received first variation pattern command is not suddenly promising big hit designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is small hit designation (step S2845). If it is designated as a small hit, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2847.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly extracts a probability variable design determining random number (step S2847). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol (for example, the symbol “9” of the odd symbols) of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability variation based on the value of the sudden probability variation design random number. (Step S2848). Then, the stop symbol of the determined first decorative symbol is stored in the first decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the first decorative symbol determined flag is set (step S2849). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the first effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S2850). In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S2845 to S2849, the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol that is the same as the sudden change is determined even if the small hit is designated. become.

  The stop symbol of the first decorative symbol in the probability big hit, normal big hit, and small hit may be determined based on the reception of the first display result command in the first decorative symbol changing process described later. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the probability variation symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the reception of the first display result command designating the probability variation big hit. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the non-probable variation symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the reception of the first display result command with the normal jackpot designation. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine a slip symbol as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the reception of the first display result command specifying the slip. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden change in probability based on the reception of the first display result command designating suddenly the probability change big hit. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the same symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change on the basis of the reception of the first display result command designating the small hit. In this case, when the first display result command cannot be received, the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine the same symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change.

  If it is not a small hit designation in step S2845, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2850 as it is. In other words, in this case, an effect control command (designating a variation pattern (variation pattern in which the EXT data shown in FIG. 14 is “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” shown in FIG. 14) used for both the probable big hit and the normal big hit ( Since the first variation pattern command is received, it is not possible to specify whether the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit only by the first fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds directly to step S2850 without determining the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol.

  In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit, it temporarily determines a predetermined symbol (for example, a non-probable variation symbol) as a stop symbol for the first decorative symbol. You may make it do. When the first display result command is received, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is determined again based on the specified content of the first display result command, and is overwritten and stored in the first decorative symbol storage area in the RAM. You may do it.

  Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the first effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S2850).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first decorative symbol variation start process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control so as to start the variation of the first decorative symbol (step S841). For example, the VDP 109 is instructed to start changing the first decorative symbol. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set in the variation time timer (that is, the variation time timer is started) (step S842), and the first display result A first display result reception time measurement timer for measuring the command reception time is started. As will be described later, when the first display result command cannot be received from the game control microcomputer 560 by the time until the first display result reception time measurement timer expires, the performance control microcomputer 100 receives the first display result command. It is determined that reception of the display result command has failed. In step S842, for example, a time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the change of the first design symbol to the high speed change is set in the first display result reception time measurement timer. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802) (step S843).

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the first decorative symbol determined flag is set (step S1830). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1844. If the shift designation, sudden probability change big hit designation, or small hit designation is specified in the first variation pattern command, the stop symbol of the first ornament design is already determined in the first variation pattern command reception waiting process, and the first ornament is determined. Since the symbol determined flag is set (see steps S2837 and S2849), the process proceeds to step S1844 as it is. When the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is specified by the first variation pattern command (that is, when the first variation pattern command for both the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received), the first decorative symbol determined flag is set. Therefore, the process proceeds to step SS1831.

  If the first decorative symbol determined flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the command reception flag is set (step S1831). If not set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the first display result reception time measurement timer by 1 (step S1832) and determines whether or not the first display result reception time measurement timer has timed out. (Step S1833). If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S1844. If the time-out has occurred, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a first display result non-reception flag indicating that the first display result command could not be received (step S1834), and the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol is set. A normal big hit symbol (decorative symbol) determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used for determination (step S1841). That is, after receiving the first variation pattern command, no effect control command is received even if a predetermined period (for example, the time from the start of the first decorative symbol variation to the high-speed variation) has elapsed. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the first display result command has not been received.

  When the command reception flag is not set in step S1831 and the first display result reception time measurement timer is up, the first display result command of the first variation pattern command specified by the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received. This is a case where reception was not possible. For this reason, since it is known that at least either the probability big hit or the normal big hit is obtained, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table, and in step S1842 described later, Control is performed so as to determine a non-probability variable symbol as a stop symbol for one decorative symbol.

  If the command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the received command is the production control command existing in the program (step S1835). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the MODE data of the first byte of the received command exists in the program such as “80”, “8C”, “A0” (FIGS. 11 to 11). 13). If it is not an effect control command that exists in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the first display result command has failed due to data corruption or the like, and proceeds to step S1838. Further, even if the MODE data exists in the program, it is confirmed whether the second byte of EXT data exists in the program with respect to the MODE data (see FIGS. 11 to 13). If it is nonexistent EXT data, it is determined that reception of the first display result command has failed due to garbled data or the like, and the process proceeds to step S1838.

  If the effect control command exists in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the first display result reception flag is set (step S1836). If not set, an effect control command other than the first display result command (for example, a first effect storage information designation command transmitted 2 ms after the first display result command) is received prior to the first display result command Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the first display result command has failed, and the process proceeds to step S1838.

  If the first display result reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the designated content of the first display result command matches the designated content of the first variation pattern command (step S1837). ). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the specified contents match based on the EXT data of the first variation pattern command saved in step S1616 and the EXT data of the first display result command saved in step S1619. To check.

  In this embodiment, the process of step S1837 is executed when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation pattern command for both the probability variation big hit / normal big hit. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a first display result command for designating a probability variation jackpot or a first display result command for designating a normal jackpot (a first display designating execution of a re-lottery effect during a round or after a big hit. (Including result commands). For this reason, in the production control microcomputer 100, the first display result command is specified to be out of place, suddenly probable big hit designation, or small hit designation even though the first variation pattern command designates the probable big hit / normal big hit. If it is a command, it is determined that the specified content does not match. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the first display result command has failed due to garbled data or the like, and proceeds to step S1838.

  Note that the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the effect control command (the second display result command or the second variation pattern command) related to the variable display of the second decorative symbol in step S <b> 1837. Thus, it may be determined that the reception of the first display result command has failed, and the process may proceed to step S1838. Similarly, when performing the second decorative pattern variation process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs an effect control command (first display result command or first display related command variable display) in the same process as step S1837. When the first variation pattern command) is received, it may be determined that reception of the second display result command has failed due to a cause such as garbled data, and the processing may proceed to the same processing as step S1838.

  In addition, when the first display result command is a command for designating a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the designated content matches. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the first display result command has been correctly received, and proceeds to step S1839.

  In step S1838, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a first display result irregular reception flag indicating that the first display result command has not been correctly received due to data corruption or the like. In addition, the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used to determine the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol (step S1841).

  If the command is not present in the program in step S1835, if the first display result reception flag is not set in step S1836, or if the first display result command is specified in step S1837, the first variation pattern command is specified. The case where it does not match the content is a case where the first display result command cannot be correctly received due to a cause such as garbled data, although the first variation pattern command designated with probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received. For this reason, since it is known that at least either the probable big hit or the normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table to decorate in step S1842 to be described later. Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  In step S1839, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first display result command is an effect control command (commands 8C02 (H) to 8C05 (H)) for designating that the probability change big hit is ( Step S1839a). If the probable big hit is designated, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the first display result command (whether the command is 8C03 (H) to 8C05 (H)). (Step S1839b) If execution of the re-drawing effect is not designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses a jackpot symbol at the time of probability change as a symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol ( A decorative pattern determination table is selected (step S1840). When the probability variation jackpot designation is not specified (that is, the normal jackpot designation is specified) or the execution of the redrawing effect is designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 is used for determining the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol. A normal big hit symbol (decorative symbol) determining table is selected as the symbol determining table (step S1841).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number, and based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number value and the selected symbol determining table, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol is extracted. A stop symbol is determined (step S1842). In this case, when the probability variation big hit symbol determination table is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the probability variation symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the selected symbol determination table. Further, when the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the non-probable variation symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the selected symbol determination table. Then, the stop symbol of the determined first decorative symbol is stored in the first decorative symbol storage area in the RAM, and the first decorative symbol determined flag is set (step S1843).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the first measurement interruption flag is set (step S1844). If the first measurement interruption flag is not set, whether or not the first interruption designation command is received. (Step S1845). If the first interruption designation command has been received, the first measurement interruption flag is set (step S1846), and the process ends. That is, from the reception of the first interruption designation command to the reception of the first resume designation command (from the start of the big hit game according to the second big hit symbol stop display until the end notification), step S1827 and subsequent steps The process is not executed, and the measurement of the variation time using the variation time timer is interrupted.

  In addition to interrupting the measurement of the variation time, when controlling to interrupt the variation of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 also interrupts the variation of the first decorative symbol. Also good. In this case, for example, when receiving the first interruption designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 stops displaying the shifted symbol on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and interrupts the variation of the first decorative symbol. Then, when receiving the first restart designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 resumes the measurement of the variation time and the variation of the first decorative design.

  If it is confirmed in step S1821 that the first measurement interruption flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first resumption designation command has been received (step S1850). If the first restart designation command has been received, the first measurement interruption flag is reset (step S1851). If the first restart designation command has not been received, the first decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  When it is confirmed in step S1845 that the first interruption designation command has not been received, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first decorative symbol stop designation command has been received (step S1847). If received, the process proceeds to step S1852. If not received, the variable time timer is decremented by 1 (step S1848). If the variation time timer has not timed out (step S1849), the first decorative symbol variation process is terminated. If the variable time timer has timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first production control process flag to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol stop process (step S803) (step S1852).

  The production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to the first decorative symbol variation stop process based on the elapse of the predetermined variation time, stops the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and derives and displays the stopped symbol. In this embodiment, when receiving the first decorative symbol stop designation command (confirmation command), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that a predetermined variation time has elapsed, and proceeds to the first decorative symbol variation stop process. . If the first decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, it is determined that the predetermined variable time has elapsed based on the time-out of the variable time timer, and the process proceeds to the first decorative symbol variation stop process. .

  In addition, only the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the time-out of the variable time timer is monitored, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. May be. In addition, when only the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command is monitored and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is stopped and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed, the first decorative symbol is stopped even if the variable time timer times out. When the designated command cannot be received, in the first decorative symbol variation processing, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is not completely stopped, and the first decorative symbol is shaken and displayed. You may repeat the display to enlarge or reduce a little.

  By the control as described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured such that when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b and the second decorative symbol display portion 9b and the big hit game state is entered, Based on the reception of the first interruption designation command from 560, the first measurement interruption flag is set and the fluctuation measurement interruption process is performed. Then, control is performed so that the processing in steps S1847 to S1852 (excluding step S1850) is not executed until a restart designation command is received. That is, control is performed so as not to measure the variation of the first decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the first decorative symbol variation display is performed, the first decorative symbol variation display is started in the first decorative symbol variation start processing, and the variation time is measured in the first decorative symbol variation processing. (See step S1848), and the variation of the first decorative symbol is continued until the variation time times out (see step S1849). On the other hand, when the first interruption designation command is received while the first decorative symbol is changing (see step S1845), the measurement of the changing time is interrupted. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S1845 based on the reception of the first interruption designation command, and sets the first measurement interruption flag in step S1846. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S1844 based on the fact that the first measurement interruption flag is set in the first decorative symbol variation process until the first restart designation command is received. By determining N in step S1850, control is performed so that the processing in steps S1847 to S1849 is not executed. In this case, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the variation time is not measured (the variation time timer is updated). When the first restart designation command is received (see step S1850). The measurement of the variation time is resumed (the process proceeds to step S1851 if it is determined as Y in step S1850), and the variation of the first decorative symbol is continued until the variation time timer times out.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol stop process (step S803) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first decorative symbol stop process, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a control to stop and display the stored stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (disconnected symbol, jackpot display symbol) (step S2871). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S2872).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process. The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first effect memory information designation command or the second effect memory information designation command is received in the hold memory display control process (step S851). If the first effect memory information designation command or the second effect memory information designation command has been received, the effect control microcomputer 100 calculates the total pending storage number (step S852). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the first reserved memory number currently stored in the first start prize storage area and the second reserved memory number currently stored in the second start prize memory area. Add up to calculate the total number of pending storage. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c according to the calculated value of the total hold storage number (step S853).

  In addition, instead of updating the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c at the timing of receiving the first effect storage information designation command or the second effect storage information designation command, for example, in the background symbol display unit 9c of the variable display device 9 You may make it update the display state of the symbol reservation memory | storage display part 18c at the timing which switches the variable display of a background symbol. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the first production storage information designation command or the second production storage information designation according to the same process as step S851 in the background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (see step S902) described later. Check whether the command has been received. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 calculates the total number of pending storages in the background symbol variation start waiting process according to the same process as in step S852. Then, in the background symbol fluctuation start waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c to a state corresponding to the calculated value of the sum hold storage number in accordance with the process similar to step S853. To do. Further, in this embodiment, after the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is derived and displayed once in the background symbol changing (first half) process, the background symbol corresponding to the second special symbol at the switching point is displayed. Variation starts. In this case, the second reserved memory number is subtracted by the game control microcomputer 560, and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first effect memory information designation command or the second effect memory information in the background symbol variation (first half) process. Check whether the specified command is received. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 calculates the total number of pending storages in the background symbol variation (first half) process according to the same process as step S852. Then, in the background symbol variation (first half) processing, the production control microcomputer 100 follows the processing similar to step S853 and changes the display state of the symbol reservation storage display unit 18c according to the calculated value of the total reservation storage number. Put it in a state.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process (step S706) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S900 to S907 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied. When the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, Control is performed so that the background pattern changes. The variation start condition of the background symbol is any of the first variation pattern designation (any of 8000 (H) to 8009 (H)) or the second variation pattern designation (8010 (H) to 8019) in the command analysis process. It is established when it is confirmed that the production control command (any of (H)) has been received. Further, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received first display result command or the second display result command, and 10 seconds (or 5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the background symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (first half) process (step S901).

  Background symbol changing (first half) process (step S901): The end of the background symbol changing time (in this case, 10 seconds or 5 seconds) is monitored. When the variation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) or the background symbol variation (second half) process (step S902). If the variation time of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol) is 10 seconds or 5 seconds, the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900). If the decorative symbol variation time exceeds 10 seconds, it is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation (second half) process (step S902). When updating to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation (second half) processing, the remaining time of the decorative symbol variation time (for example, if the ornament symbol variation time is 20 seconds) is left as the background symbol variation time. Time is set to 10 seconds). Further, the time when the background symbol variation (first half) processing is completed (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation) corresponds to the switching point described above.

  Background symbol changing (second half) processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol changing time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S903). In the background symbol variation (second half) processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 may extend the background symbol variation time. For example, when the background symbol change is started in response to reception of one of the first variation pattern designations, and one of the second variation pattern designations is received during the background symbol variation (second half) processing It is.

  Background symbol stop process (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the change of the background symbol and display the stop symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) or the jackpot display process (step S904). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to a value corresponding to. During the period when the background symbol stop process is executed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the first missed symbol stop process (second missed symbol stop process) or the first big hit symbol stop process (second big hit symbol stop process). Is the same as the period.

  Big hit display processing (step S904): Control of big hit display is performed. Then, when receiving a winning prize opening opening display command (a winning prize opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to a value corresponding to step S905). The period during which the jackpot display process is executed is the same as the period when the first jackpot display process or the second jackpot display process is executed by the game control microcomputer 560.

  In-round processing (step S905): Display control during round is performed. For example, display control of the number of rounds is performed until a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening has been opened (during closing) is received. If the re-lottery execution flag is set during the round, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Post-round processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, the interval display is performed until a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is being opened is received.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when it is confirmed that the ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received in the mid-round processing, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900). In addition, if execution of the re-lottery effect (after-hit re-lottery effect) is designated by the ending command, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which data to be referred to when the production control microcomputer 100 executes background symbol control is set. That is, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the background symbol display unit 9c in accordance with the data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the background symbol is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table and performs control for variably displaying the background symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 lights various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value in synchronization with the control of the background symbol display unit 9c based on the display control execution data. The state is controlled, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. That is, the various lamps and the speaker 27 are controlled in synchronization with the control of the background symbol display unit 9c.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. Furthermore, different process tables are prepared according to differences in the production mode when the announcement production is executed. That is, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the notice effect is realized based on the process data set in the selected process table. In other words, the production control microcomputer 100 performs production control according to the contents of the process table corresponding to the production mode of the announcement effect when executing the announcement effect.

  Hereinafter, processing such as background symbol variation start waiting processing in background symbol process will be described. In the following description, a case where the gaming state is a probability change state or a normal state is taken as an example. When the gaming state is the short-time state, the time set for the various timers is a value corresponding to half the time in the following description. Further, in the background symbol variation start start waiting process, the control for starting the variation of the background symbol is started based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, and the background symbol based on the reception of the second variation pattern command. In the following description, the case where the control for starting the variation of the background symbol is started based on the reception of the first variation pattern command is taken as an example. In addition, when starting the control which starts the fluctuation | variation of a background symbol based on having received the 2nd fluctuation | variation pattern command, the value set to the background symbol fluctuation | variation time timer A and a background symbol fluctuation | variation time timer in the following description The value set for B is reversed.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts showing the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900). In the background symbol variation start waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1801). If it is set, the flag is reset (step S1802).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received variation pattern command is designated as a deviation (step S1803). If the designation is out of date, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a random symbol for determining the off symbol (step S1804), and based on the value of the random symbol for determining the off symbol, the left middle right background symbol corresponding to the off symbol is stopped. A symbol is determined (step S1805). Then, the determined background symbol stop symbol is stored in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and a symbol determined flag indicating that the background symbol stop symbol has been determined is set (step S1806).

  If the received variation pattern command is not an outlier designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the sudden variation jackpot designation is abrupt (step S1815). If the sudden probability change big hit is designated, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the sudden probability change big hit effect flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit is designated (step S1816), and the process proceeds to step S1820.

  If the received variation pattern command is not suddenly probable big hit designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is small hit designation (step S1817). If the small hit is designated, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit effect flag indicating that the small hit is designated (step S1818), and the process proceeds to step S1820.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly extracts a probability variable design determining random number (step S1820). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol corresponding to the sudden probability variation based on the value of the sudden probability variation symbol random number (step S1821). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as the stop symbol of the background symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change. Then, the determined background symbol stop symbol is stored in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag is set (step S1822). In this embodiment, the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357”, which is the same as the sudden probability change, is executed even when a small hit is specified by executing the processing of steps S1817 to S1822. Will be determined.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol of the background symbol in the sudden probability big hit and the stop symbol of the background symbol in the small hit are determined based on receiving the display result command in the background symbol changing (first half) processing described later. Also good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command designating sudden probability change jackpot, and a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as stop symbols of the background symbols corresponding to sudden probability change. May be determined. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” that are the same as the stop symbol of the background symbol corresponding to the sudden change in probability based on the reception of the display result command designated by the small hit. You may decide. In this case, if the display result command cannot be received, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” that are the same as the stop symbol of the background symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change. Can be determined.

  If it is not the small hit designation at step S1817, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1823 as it is. That is, in this case, the fluctuation pattern used for both the probable big hit and the normal big hit (the first fluctuation pattern of EXT data “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” shown in FIG. 14 or the EXT data is “ 14 (H) ”to“ 16 (H) ”(second variation pattern) is specified when the production control command (variation pattern command) is received. Therefore, with only the variation pattern command, the big hit type is the probability variation big hit. It is not possible to determine whether it is a big hit or not. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1823 without determining the stop symbol of the background symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the background symbol variation pattern No. based on the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command (in this example, the first variation pattern command). 1 or No. 9 is selected (step S1823). In this case, when receiving the variation pattern command designating the shortening variation, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the background symbol variation pattern No. 5 having the variation time of 5 seconds (that is, the variation time of the shortening variation). Select 9. Otherwise, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 having a variation time of 10 seconds. Select 1.

  In addition, it is a case where it controls so that the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol (1st decoration symbol) and the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol (2nd decoration symbol) are not performed simultaneously, Comprising: The fluctuation pattern which designates reach production When the command is received, the production control microcomputer 100 may select the variation pattern of the background symbol with the reach production corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in step S1823. For example, when the variation pattern command 8001 (H) in which the reach A is specified and the variation time is 20 seconds is received, the effect control microcomputer 100 may select the background symbol variation pattern 4 shown in FIG. .

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used (step S1824). When executing the notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data including the notice effect. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes effects according to the notice contents during the change of the background symbol by executing the processes of steps S1826, S962, and S986 according to the selected process data.

  In step S1824, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the background designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is any one of the high probability state background designation command, the normal state background designation command, and the sudden probability change state background designation command. To check. If the high-probability state background designation command has been received, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for probability variation according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used. If the normal state background designation command has been received, the production control microcomputer 100 selects normal process data according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used.

  Further, when the sudden probability change background designation command is received (that is, when sudden probability change big hit is determined), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a special production according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used. Select process data for In addition, even when the normal state background designation command is received, if it is determined to be a small hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the special effect according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used. Select process data for Then, if it is determined that the sudden probability big hit or the small hit is suddenly changed, the sudden chance big hit or the small hit is suddenly changed until the special production period measurement timer for measuring the production period using the process data for the special production times out. Even after the control is completed, process data for special effects is selected over a predetermined period of time, and background pattern variation display is executed.

  In this embodiment, as process data according to the background pattern variation pattern, process data for probability change used when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and normal data used when the gaming state is the normal state Process data and special production process data used when suddenly changing big hits or small hits are used. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the process data for probability change or the process data for normal, so that different background colors (for example, when the game state is in the normal state and in the normal state) "Red" is displayed in the probable state, and "blue" in the normal state), and the background symbol is variably displayed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a background color (for example, “green”) that is different from that used when the process data for probability change and normal use is selected by selecting special production process data. Perform variable display of symbols. In addition, the effect performed using the process data for special effects may be any effect as long as the effect pattern is different from the effect pattern used at the normal time and the probability change, for example, without fluctuation of the background pattern. Alternatively, an effect of causing a predetermined character to appear on the display screen of the variable display device 9 may be executed. By doing so, when the background symbol is variably displayed during sudden change big hit or small hit, it is possible to obscure whether the gaming state is the probability changing state or the normal state. Can raise the expectation that it may or may not be probable.

  It should be noted that the variation of the background symbol that was executed after suddenly hitting a big hit or a small hit suddenly, instead of measuring the period during which the background symbol change display using the process data for special effects was made using the special effect period measurement timer You may make it measure the frequency | count of a display. The background using the process data for special effects until the background symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, not limited to 10 times, but may be more than 10 times, for example). You may make it perform the change display of a symbol.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may notify that the change is surely made at the end of the period during which the background symbol variation display using the special production process data is completed. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 is surely changed by causing a predetermined character to appear on the display screen of the variable display device 9 or displaying a sentence such as “probable big hit” at the end of the period. You may alert | report. Further, after informing that the effect control microcomputer 100 is the probability variation, the variation control of the background symbol is executed using the process data for probability variation (for high probability) and the process data for sudden probability variation. May be.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table to the process timer and starts the process timer (step S1825). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S1826). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Then, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the background symbol variation time timer A, and the background symbol variation time timer A is started (step S1827). Hereinafter, in this embodiment, a case where 10 seconds is set in the background symbol fluctuation time timer A will be described. When the variation pattern of the shortening variation is specified in the variation pattern command, the variation time of the shortening variation of 5 seconds is set in the background symbol variation time timer A.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the first decorative pattern and the second variation pattern command when the variation of the background symbol based on the reception of the first variation pattern command is received by the total time timer. When changing the background symbol based on the above, a value corresponding to the variation time of the second decorative symbol) is set and the overall variation time timer is started (step S1828). When the decorative symbol variation time is 10 seconds (or 5 seconds), the value set in the overall variation time timer is the same as the value set in the background symbol variation time timer A in step S1827. . As will be described later, when the background symbol variation time timer B is set in step S976, the overall variation time timer (when a new variation pattern command is received after the variation of the background symbol is started). ), The value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer B is updated.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command is a big hit designation fluctuation pattern command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H), 8014 (H) to 8016 (H)). Confirmation is made (step S1829). If it is a big hit designation variation pattern command, a display result reception time measurement timer for measuring the reception time of the display result command is started (step S1830). As will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the first display result command or the second display result command from the game control microcomputer 560 until the display result reception time measurement timer expires. Determines that the reception of the first display result command or the second display result command has failed. In step S1830, the display result reception time measurement timer is set with, for example, a time (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the background symbol change to the high-speed change. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (first half) process (step S901) (step S1831).

  In the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process, if it is determined that the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (4 in this example), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. The variable display time until the symbol is derived and displayed is shortened, and a variation pattern command for designating a shortened variation is transmitted. Therefore, if it is determined in the first variation pattern setting process or the second variation pattern setting process that the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example), the first special symbol ( The variable display time until the background symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol) or the second special symbol (second symbol) is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c is also shortened (see step S921). Therefore, even if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a shortening variation occurs during variable display of either the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol). However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed during the other variable display.

  For example, when the total reserved memory number is 4 (for example, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the second reserved memory number is 2), or when the combined reserved memory number is 5 (for example, the first reserved memory number) When the number of memories is 3 and the number of second reserved memories is 2, when the number of accumulated reserved memories is 4, (for example, when the number of first reserved memories is 3 and the number of second reserved memories is 1, Since the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value “4”, the background symbol display unit 9c performs a shortening variation of the background symbol, and one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 0. However, when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more (for example, when the number of first reserved memories is 4 and the number of second reserved memories is 0), the background symbol display unit 9c has a background symbol shortening variation. Done.

  50 to 55 are flowcharts showing the background symbol variation (first half) processing (step S901). In the background symbol changing (first half) processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the symbol determined flag is set (step S910). If set, the process proceeds to step S941. Note that if the variation pattern command specifies a deviation, suddenly probable big hit or small hit, the background symbol stop symbol has already been determined and the symbol determined flag has been set in the background symbol variation start waiting process. (See Steps S1806 and S1822) Therefore, the process directly proceeds to Step S941. When the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is specified by the variation pattern command (that is, when the variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received), the symbol determined flag is not set, so the process goes to step S911. Transition.

  If the symbol determined flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the command reception flag is set (step S911). If not set, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the display result reception time measurement timer by 1 (step S912) and determines whether or not the display result reception time measurement timer has timed out (step S913). ). If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S941. If time-out has occurred, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result non-reception flag indicating that the first display result command or the second display result command could not be received (step S914), and the background symbol jackpot The normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used to determine the symbol (step S933). That is, after receiving the variation pattern command, no effect control command has been received even after a predetermined period (for example, the time from the start of variation of the background symbol to the arrival of high-speed variation) has elapsed. The production control microcomputer 100 determines that the first display result command or the second display result command could not be received.

  The case where the command reception flag is not set and the display result reception time measurement timer is timed up in step S911 means that the display result command cannot be received although the variation pattern command specified by the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received. is there. For this reason, since it is known that at least either the probable big hit or the normal big hit is given, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table, and in step S934, which will be described later, the background. Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  If the command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the received command is the production control command existing in the program (step S911). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the MODE data of the first byte of the received command exists in the program such as “80”, “8C”, “A0” (FIGS. 11 to 11). 13). If it is not an effect control command that exists in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the display result command has failed due to garbled data or the like, and proceeds to step S918.

  If it is an effect control command that exists in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the first display result reception flag or the second display result reception flag is set (step S916). If not set, it is a case where an effect control command other than the display result command (for example, an effect storage information designation command) is received prior to the display result command, and therefore the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the display result command. The process proceeds to step S918.

  If the first display result reception flag or the second display result reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the specified content of the display result command matches the specified content of the variation pattern command. (Step S917). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the specified content matches based on the EXT data of the variation pattern command saved in step S1616 and the EXT data of the display result command saved in step S1619. .

  In this embodiment, the process of step S917 is executed when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command for designating a probability variation jackpot or a display result command for designating a normal jackpot (including a display result command for designating execution of a re-lottery effect during a round or after a big hit). Should receive. For this reason, in the production control microcomputer 100, the display result command is a command for specifying an outlier, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit even though the variation pattern command designates a probable big hit / normal big hit. If it is determined that the specified content does not match. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the display result command has failed due to garbled data or the like, and proceeds to step S918.

  When the first variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1801, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect control command (such as a second display result command or a second display result command) related to variable display of the second decorative symbol in steps S916 and S917. Also when the second variation pattern command) is received, it may be determined that reception of the first display result command has failed due to a cause such as garbled data, and the process may proceed to step S918. Similarly, when the second variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1801, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect control command (first display result command) related to variable display of the first decorative symbol in steps S916 and S917. Or the first variation pattern command) may be determined to have failed to receive the second display result command due to garbled data or the like, and the process may proceed to step S918.

  In addition, when the display result command is a command that specifies a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the specified content matches. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the display result command has been correctly received, and proceeds to step S919.

  In step S918, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result irregular reception flag indicating that the first display result command or the second display result command has not been correctly received due to data corruption or the like. Further, the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used for determining the big hit symbol of the background symbol (step S933).

  If the command does not exist in the program in step S915, if the display result reception flag is not set in step S916, or the specified content of the display result command does not match the specified content of the variation pattern command in step S917 The case is a case in which a variation pattern command designated as probable big hit / normal big hit has been received, but the display result command has not been correctly received due to garbled data or the like. For this reason, since it is known that at least either the probable big hit or the normal big hit is given, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table, and in step S934, which will be described later, the background. Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  In step S919, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command: 8C01 (H), 8C11 (H)) that designates that the display result command is a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Check whether or not. If the normal big hit is designated, a normal big hit effect flag indicating that the normal big hit is designated is set (step S920), and the process proceeds to step S933.

  If the big hit is not normally designated, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the display result command is a production control command (probable variation big hit designation command: 8C02 (H), 8C12 (H)) that designates that the display result command is a probable big hit. (Step S921). If the probability variation big hit is designated, a probability variation big hit effect flag indicating that the probability variation big hit is designated is set (step S922), and the process proceeds to step S932.

  If the probability variation big hit is not designated, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that the display result command is a probability variation big hit, and also produces an effect control command (in-round re-lottery) that designates that the re-lottery effect is to be executed It is confirmed whether or not it is a certain probability change big hit designation command: 8C03 (H), 8C13 (H)) (step S923). If it is a probable big hit designation command with a re-lottery during the round, a probable big hit effect flag is set (step S924). In addition, a round re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the big hit game is set (step S925), and the process proceeds to step S933.

  If it is not a probable big hit designation command with a re-lottery during the round, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that it is a promising big hit and designates that the re-lottery effect after the big win is executed (end of big hit) It is confirmed whether or not a probable big hit designation command with subsequent re-lottery: 8C04 (H), 8C14 (H)) (step S926). If it is a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery after the big hit, the probable big hit effect flag is set (step S927). In addition, a big lottery re-lottery execution flag indicating execution of the re-lottery effect in the ending effect after the big hit ends is set (step S928), and the process proceeds to step S933.

  If it is not a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery after the big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that it is a probable big hit and designates that the re-lottery effect during the round and the re-lottery effect after the big win are executed. This means that an effect control command (probable big hit designation command with re-lottery designation: 8C05 (H), 8C15 (H)) has been received. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the probability variation big hit production flag (step S929), sets the re-lottery execution flag during round (step S930), and sets the post lottery re-lottery execution flag (step S931). ). Then, control goes to a step S933.

  In step S932, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the probability change jackpot symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used to determine the jackpot symbol of the background symbol. In step S933, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the normal-time big hit symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used for determining the big hit symbol of the background symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number, and based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number value and the selected symbol determining table, the left middle right background corresponding to the jackpot A symbol stop symbol is determined (step S934). In this case, when the probability change jackpot symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a stop symbol for the background symbol (for example, the left, middle, and right symbols). So that the symbols are aligned with the same odd number of symbols). When the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a stop symbol for the background symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol). So that the symbols are aligned with the same even number of symbols). Then, the determined background symbol stop symbol is stored in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag is set (step S935).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the entire variation time timer and the value of the background symbol variation time timer A by 1 (steps S941 and S942). When the value of the total variation time timer is 0, the process of decrementing the value of the total variation time timer by -1 is not executed, and when the value of the background symbol variation time timer A is 0, the background symbol variation time is Processing for decrementing the value of timer A by -1 is not executed. If the background symbol variation time timer B is set, the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is decremented by 1 (step S943). The background symbol variation time timer B is a timer that is set when a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) is received after the variation of the background symbol is started. In addition, the background symbol variation time timer B is set to a value corresponding to the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the newly received variation pattern command.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the background symbol variation time timer A has timed out, that is, whether or not the value of the background symbol variation time timer A has become 0 (step S944). If the background symbol fluctuation time timer A has timed out, the process proceeds to step S953. If not timed out, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S945). When the process timer times out (when the value becomes 0), the process data is switched (steps S946 and S947). That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer, and the rendering device (variable) is set based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The control state for the display device 9 or the like is changed.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) has been received (step S949), and if received, the background symbol B variation request flag. Is set (step S950), and the background symbol variation time timer B is set to a value corresponding to the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the newly received variation pattern command (step S951). ). The background symbol B fluctuation request flag is a flag indicating that a new fluctuation pattern command has been received before becoming a switching point. The background symbol B is a background symbol that starts to vary when it is assumed that the symbol is started based on the reception of a new variation pattern command. However, the background pattern B is not changed at the time of the switching point.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the newly received variation pattern command is a variation designation command (commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)) designated as a deviation (step S951a). If the change pattern command is not an outlier specification, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the sudden change big hit is specified (step S951b). If the sudden probability change big hit is designated, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the sudden probability change big hit effect flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit is designated (step S951c), and proceeds to step S951f.

  If the received variation pattern command is not suddenly probable big hit designation, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is small hit designation (step S951d). If it is designated as a small hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit effect flag indicating that a small hit is designated (step S951e), and proceeds to step S951f.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly extracts a probability variable design determining random number (step S951f). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change based on the value of the sudden probability change symbol determination random number (step S951g). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a combination of symbols such as “123” and “357” as the stop symbol of the background symbol corresponding to the sudden probability change. The determined background symbol stop symbol is stored in the background symbol storage area in the RAM (step S951h).

  If it is not a small hit designation in step S951d, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S951i as it is. That is, in this case, the fluctuation pattern used for both the probable big hit and the normal big hit (the first fluctuation pattern of EXT data “04 (H)” to “06 (H)” shown in FIG. 14 or the EXT data is “ 14 (H) ”to“ 16 (H) ”(second variation pattern) is specified when the production control command (variation pattern command) is received. Therefore, with only the variation pattern command, the big hit type is the probability variation big hit. It is not possible to determine whether it is a big hit or not. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S951i as it is without determining the stop symbol of the background symbol.

  In step S951i, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the symbol determined flag and sets a symbol reset execution flag (step S951i). The symbol reset execution flag is a flag for specifying resetting of the background symbol stop symbol when a new variation pattern command for designating a big hit is received during the variation of the background symbol. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a display result reception time measurement timer (step S951j). In this case, based on the fact that the symbol reset flag is set in step S951i, the background symbol stop symbol is reset in the background symbol changing (second half) processing described later (steps S613a to S613a). (See S613k).

  If it is determined in step S944 that the background symbol variation time timer A has timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the background symbol B variation determination flag is set (step S953). A control for temporarily stopping the symbol deviating symbol is performed (step S956), and the background symbol B variation determination flag is reset (step S957). Then, control goes to a step S976. Note that when the background symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop state is maintained only for a predetermined temporary stop period. However, such control includes data indicating the temporary stop in the temporary stop period. This is realized by setting in association with the data indicating.

  Note that the background symbol B variation determination flag is to switch the background symbol variation corresponding to the variation of the decorative symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the background symbol. This is set when the change time after switching does not coincide with any of the change times shown in FIG. For example, the variation time of the decorative pattern indicated by the new variation pattern command is 20 seconds. However, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the background symbol, the variation has already been made for 3 seconds (the variation variation start of the background symbol). In the case where the decoration pattern indicated by the new variation pattern command is started when 7 seconds have elapsed from the time), the variation time after switching is 17 seconds. In that case, it does not coincide with any of the fluctuation times shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when such a situation occurs, the end time of the decoration symbol change indicated by the new variation pattern command is determined as the background symbol by using any of the background symbol variation times shown in FIG. Control is performed so that the switching point is moved so that the fluctuation time elapses. In the above example, if the variation time of the background symbol of 15 seconds is used, the switching point is shifted by 2 seconds so that the end point of the variation of the decoration symbol becomes the time when the variation time of the background symbol has elapsed. That is, 12 seconds after the start of the change of the background symbol becomes the changed switching point.

  If it is confirmed in step S953 that the background symbol B variation determination flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the first ornament symbol stop designation command or the second ornament symbol stop designation command has been received. (Step S953A). If received, the process proceeds to step S954B. If neither the first decorative symbol stop designation command nor the second decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, it is confirmed whether or not the total variation time timer has timed out (step S954A). If the total variation time timer has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the background symbol B variation request flag is set (step S954B). If the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is set, the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is reset (step S954C), and the process proceeds to step S975. If the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is not set, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S905) (step S955). If the total variation time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S958.

  The production control microcomputer 100 shifts to the background symbol variation stop process based on the elapse of the predetermined variation time, stops the variable display of the background symbol, and derives and displays the stop symbol. In this embodiment, when receiving the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the second decorative symbol stop designation command (confirmation command), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, and the background symbol. Shift to variable stop processing. If the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the second decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, it is determined that the predetermined variation time has passed based on the fact that the total variation time timer has timed out, and the background Shift to symbol variation stop processing.

  Note that the variable display of the background symbol is stopped and stopped only by monitoring whether the first ornament symbol stop designation command or the second ornament symbol stop designation command is received or the total variation time timer has timed out. The symbol may be derived and displayed. In addition, when only the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the second decorative symbol stop designation command is monitored and the variable display of the background symbol is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed, the total variation time timer times out. However, if the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the second decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, the background symbol variation display is not completely stopped in the background symbol variation (first half) process. The background design may be displayed in a shaking manner, or the background design may be repeatedly enlarged or reduced.

  The fact that the background symbol B variation request flag is not set when the total variation time timer times out means that the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol is 10 This means that a new variation pattern command has not been received during the variation time. The fact that the total variation time timer has not timed out means that the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol exceeds 10 seconds.

  In step S958, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is set. If the background symbol B variation request flag is not set, that is, if a new variation pattern command is not received before 10 seconds have elapsed since the beginning of variation of the background symbol, the value of the total variation time timer (decoration A background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 15) is selected according to the symbol variation time (corresponding to a time obtained by subtracting 10 seconds from the symbol variation time) (step S959). Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S960). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S961). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S962). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (second half) process (step S902) (step S963).

  Specifically, in step S962, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data 1, whereby the variable display device 9 executes the background symbol variation display. In this case, when the display control command 100 cannot receive the display result command or cannot correctly receive the display result command due to garbled data or the like, the display control microcomputer 100 displays the display screen of the variable display device 9. An error display (for example, a character such as “error” or a symbol such as “?”) May be displayed on a part (for example, an end portion of the display screen). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may display an error on a part of the display screen of the variable display device 9 if the display result non-reception flag or the display result irregular reception flag is set.

  When the background symbol B variation request flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the background symbol B variation request flag (step S965). Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A (in this example, the first decorative symbol. The variation of the background symbol A also corresponds to the variation of the first special symbol) is determined as the big hit symbol. (Step S965B). If the big hit symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S969. When the jackpot symbol is not determined, the value of the total variation time timer (corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting 10 seconds from the variation time of the decorative symbol) and the value of the background symbol variation time timer B (the new variation pattern command indicates) It is compared with the variation time of the decorative pattern (corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting the time from the start of the variation to the switching point) (step S966). When the value of the total variation time timer is larger, the process proceeds to step S969.

  When the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is larger, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 15) having a variation time that matches the value of the background symbol variation time timer B. Whether or not (step S975). If there is such a background symbol variation pattern, control is performed to temporarily stop the background symbol deviation symbol (step S975B), and the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is set to the overall variation time timer (step S976). Then, the process proceeds to step S983.

  When there is no background symbol variation pattern having a variation time that matches the value of the background symbol variation time timer B, the maximum value among the variation times smaller than the value of the background symbol variation time timer B (see FIG. 15). A value obtained by subtracting the value of the background symbol variation time timer B from the background symbol variation time timer A is set (step S978), and the background symbol variation determination flag is set (step S979). For example, when the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is a value corresponding to 17 seconds, the maximum value among the variation times (see FIG. 15) smaller than the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is 15 seconds. Therefore, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the background symbol fluctuation time timer A. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the background symbol A is adjusted, but the fluctuation time of the background symbol B may be adjusted. For example, you may make it adjust the time of the high-speed fluctuation | variation performed for the background symbol B first.

  The processing in steps S978 and S979 is processing for changing the switching point. After the processing of steps S978 and S979 is executed, when the background symbol changing (first half) processing is executed, the processing of steps S942 to S944 is executed, and when the background symbol changing time timer A times out, Since the switching point has arrived, the process of step S953 is executed.

  In step S969, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a background symbol variation pattern used in the background symbol variation in-process (second half). Specifically, a background symbol variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the value of the entire variation time timer is selected.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation stop symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) determined in step S949 is a jackpot symbol. (Step S970). If it is not a big hit symbol, the process proceeds to step S960. If it is a big hit symbol, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a background symbol stop request flag (step S973). Then, control goes to a step S960. The background symbol stop request flag is a flag that specifies that the background symbol is to be stopped.

  In this embodiment, after determining that the display results of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol are jackpot symbols, at least in a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed, the second special symbol and the first special symbol are displayed. The display result of the two decorative symbols is forcibly determined to be a disjoint symbol. Therefore, the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol a jackpot symbol and the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol the jackpot symbol are not executed at the same time. After Y is determined in S965B, Y is not determined in step S970. Therefore, it is determined as Y in step S970 when it is determined in step S966 that the value of the total variation time timer is larger and the process proceeds to step S969.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time corresponds to the sum of the jackpot symbol display time and the jackpot display time (the value of the jackpot display time set in step S354 in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 21, The second special symbol variation process is equivalent to the value of the jackpot display time set in the process corresponding to the process of step S354). In other words, it is the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the big hit game is started.

  Further, in the production control microcomputer 100, for example, when the display result command received immediately after the reception of the second variation pattern command is the probability change jackpot designation command, the probability variation jackpot designation command, the hourly jackpot designation command, or the normal jackpot designation command. Whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) is a jackpot symbol depending on whether or not the flag is set. Can be determined. In addition, the end of the variation of the decorative symbol can be confirmed by the value of the background symbol variation time timer B.

  In addition, since the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the first decorative symbol are synchronized and the variation of the second special symbol and the variation of the second decorative symbol are synchronized, in this example, the background symbol A is Since it starts in response to the variation of the first decorative symbol, the end of the variation of the background symbol A and the end of the variation of the first decorative symbol are the same time, and the processing of steps S970 to S973 is the first special symbol. Also, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change after the start of the first decorative symbol change and the end of the change, and the background symbol stop request flag is set (step S973).

  In step S983, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a background symbol variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer. The background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S983 is No. when the determination in step S975 is “Y”. 3 *, no. 5 * or No. 7 * (variation time is 15 seconds, 25 seconds, or 35 seconds. When it is determined that a new variation pattern command has been received in step S949, the background symbol variation time timer B sets the variation time in step S951. A corresponding value (a value corresponding to 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or 40 seconds)) is set, but after that, before the determination of step S944 for the switching point is performed, the background symbol fluctuation time timer B must be set. Since the value is subtracted (see step S943), if the determination in step S975 is “Y”, the background symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or 40 seconds in the process of step S983. Is never selected. When a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the background symbol variation time timer B in the process of step S951, when the determination in step S975 is “N”, the process proceeds to step S978, where the background symbol variation time is set. The background symbol fluctuation time timer A is set to a value obtained by subtracting the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer B from the fluctuation time of 5 seconds of the shortening fluctuation smaller than the value of the timer B (smaller than the value corresponding to 10 seconds). become. In this case, if “N” is determined in the determination in step S975, the process may proceed to step S955. If the determination in step S953 is “Y”, No. in the process of step S983. 2 * -No. A background symbol variation pattern of any one of 7 * (variation time 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 30 seconds or 35 seconds) is selected.

  The process of step S983 is executed when it is determined that the background symbol fluctuation time timer B is larger in the determination of step S966 (when both of the determinations of steps S954A and S954B are “Y”). except for.). In that case, the remaining time of the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is 10 seconds or more, and the total variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is 20 seconds. This is the case of 30 seconds or 40 seconds (see FIG. 15). That is, when the process of step S983 is executed, the entire variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is not 10 seconds.

  Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S984). Then, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S985). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S986). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (second half) process (step S902) (step S987).

  56 to 59 are flowcharts showing the background symbol changing (second half) processing (step S902). In the background symbol variation (second half) processing, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the total variation time timer by 1 (step S611), and issues a first ornament symbol stop designation command or a second ornament symbol stop designation command. It is confirmed whether it has been received (step S612a). If received, the process proceeds to step S613. If neither the first decorative symbol stop designation command nor the second decorative symbol stop designation command is received, it is confirmed whether or not the total variation time timer has timed out (the value of the total variation time timer has become 0). If the total variation time timer has timed out (step S612b), the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S905) (step S613).

  When the total variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol reset execution flag is set (step S613a). If not set, the process proceeds to step S614. If a shift is specified in the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command, the background symbol stop symbol is already determined in the background symbol variation start waiting process, and the symbol determined flag is set ( Therefore, the process proceeds to step S614 as it is.

  If the symbol reset execution flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the command reception flag is set (step S613b). If not set, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the display result reception time measurement timer (step S613c) and determines whether or not the display result reception time measurement timer has timed out (step S613d). ). If not timed out, the process proceeds to step S614. If time-out has occurred, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result non-reception flag indicating that the first display result command or the second display result command could not be received (step S613e), and the background symbol jackpot The normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used to determine the symbol (step S613x). That is, since the production control command 100 is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined period after receiving the variation pattern command, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the first display result command or the second display result command. Is not received.

  The case where the command reception flag is not set in step S613b and the display result reception time measurement timer is timed up is a case where the variation pattern command specified by the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received but the display result command cannot be received. is there. Therefore, since it is known that at least either the probability big hit or the normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table, so that the background in step S613y to be described later Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  If the command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received command is the production control command existing in the program (step S613f). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether the MODE data of the first byte of the received command exists in the program such as “80”, “8C”, “A0” (FIGS. 11 to 11). 13). If it is not an effect control command existing in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the display result command has failed due to a cause such as garbled data, and proceeds to step S613i.

  If the effect control command exists in the program, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether the first display result reception flag or the second display result reception flag is set (step S613g). If not set, it is a case where an effect control command other than the display result command (for example, an effect storage information designation command) is received prior to the display result command, and therefore the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the display result command. The process proceeds to step S613i.

  If the first display result reception flag or the second display result reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the specified content of the display result command matches the specified content of the variation pattern command. (Step S613h). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the specified content matches based on the EXT data of the variation pattern command saved in step S1616 and the EXT data of the display result command saved in step S1619. .

  In this embodiment, the process of step S613h is executed when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a display result command for designating a probability variation jackpot or a display result command for designating a normal jackpot (including a display result command for designating execution of a re-lottery effect during a round or after a big hit). Should receive. For this reason, in the production control microcomputer 100, the display result command is a command for specifying an outlier, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit even though the variation pattern command designates a probable big hit / normal big hit. If it is determined that the specified content does not match. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that reception of the display result command has failed due to garbled data or the like, and proceeds to step S613i.

  When the first variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1801, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect control command (second display result command or the like regarding variable display of the second decorative symbol in steps S613g and S613h). Also when the second variation pattern command) is received, it may be determined that reception of the first display result command has failed due to a cause such as garbled data, and the process may proceed to step S613i. Similarly, when the second variation pattern reception flag is set in step S1801, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an effect control command (first display result command) related to variable display of the first decorative symbol in steps S613g and S613h. Or the first variation pattern command) may be determined to have failed to receive the second display result command due to garbled data or the like, and the process may proceed to step S613i.

  In addition, when the display result command is a command that specifies a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the specified content matches. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the display result command has been correctly received, and proceeds to step S613j.

  In step S613i, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result irregular reception flag indicating that the first display result command or the second display result command could not be correctly received due to data corruption or the like. Also, the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected as the symbol determination table used for determining the big hit symbol of the background symbol (step S613x).

  If the command does not exist in the program in step S613f, if the display result reception flag is not set in step S613g, or the specified content of the display result command does not match the specified content of the variation pattern command in step S613h The case is a case where the variation pattern command specified by the probable big hit / normal big hit is received, but the display result command cannot be correctly received due to garbled data or the like. Therefore, since it is known that at least either the probability big hit or the normal big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the normal big hit symbol determination table, so that the background in step S613y to be described later Control is performed so as to determine a non-probable variation symbol as a symbol stop symbol.

  In step S613j, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command: 8C01 (H), 8C11 (H)) that designates that the display result command is a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit). Check whether or not. If the normal big hit is designated, a normal big hit effect flag indicating that the normal big hit is designated is set (step S613k), and the process proceeds to step S613x.

  If the big hit is not normally designated, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the display result command is a production control command (probable variation big hit designation command: 8C02 (H), 8C12 (H)) that designates that the display result command is a probable big hit. (Step S613l). If the probability variation big hit is specified, a probability variation big hit effect flag indicating that the probability variation big hit is designated is set (step S613m), and the process proceeds to step S613n.

  If the probability variation big hit is not designated, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that the display result command is a probability variation big hit, and also produces an effect control command (re-lottery during round) that designates that the re-lottery effect during the round is executed. It is confirmed whether or not it is a probability variation big hit designation command: 8C03 (H), 8C13 (H)) (step S613o). If it is a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery during the round, the probable big hit effect flag is set (step S613p). In addition, a round re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the big hit game is set (step S613q), and the process proceeds to step S613x.

  If it is not a probable big hit designation command with a re-lottery during the round, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that it is a promising big hit and designates that the re-lottery effect after the big win is executed (end of big hit) It is confirmed whether or not the probable big hit designation command with subsequent re-lottery is 8C04 (H), 8C14 (H)) (step S613r). If it is a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery after the big hit, the probable big hit effect flag is set (step S613s). Also, after the big hit, a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big hit is set (step S613t), and the process proceeds to step S613x.

  If it is not a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery after the big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 designates that it is a probable big hit and designates that the re-lottery effect during the round and the re-lottery effect after the big win are executed. This means that an effect control command (probable big hit designation command with re-lottery designation: 8C05 (H), 8C15 (H)) has been received. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a probability variation jackpot production flag (step S613u), sets a re-lottery execution flag during round (step S613v), and sets a post-hit re-lottery execution flag (step S613w). ). Then, control goes to a step S613x.

  In step S613n, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the probability change jackpot symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used to determine the background symbol jackpot symbol. In step S613x, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the normal-time big hit symbol determination table as the symbol determination table used for determining the big hit symbol of the background symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determining random number, and based on the extracted jackpot symbol determining random number value and the selected symbol determining table, the left middle right background corresponding to the jackpot A stop symbol of the symbol is determined (step S613y). In this case, when the probability change jackpot symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a stop symbol for the background symbol (for example, the left, middle, and right symbols). So that the symbols are aligned with the same odd number of symbols). When the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the selected symbol determination table as a stop symbol for the background symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol). So that the symbols are aligned with the same even number of symbols). Then, the stop symbol of the determined background symbol is stored in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and the symbol determined flag is set (step S613z).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the background symbol stop request flag (see step S973 and step S636) is set (step S614), and if not, moves to step S616. If the background symbol stop request flag is set, a decorative symbol (this is a second variation pattern command (in this example, refer to the second variation pattern command, step S620 and step S949 in FIG. 52)) is received. In the example, it is confirmed whether or not the variation of the second decorative symbols has been completed (step S615). It should be noted that whether or not the decorative symbol variation based on the reception of the new variation pattern command has ended is, for example, that the second decorative symbol stop designation command has been received or the value of the second decorative symbol process flag is Judgment is made by changing to a value corresponding to the two decorative symbol stop process.

  When the variation of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the new variation pattern command is completed, the effect control microcomputer 100 updates the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S903). (Step S627).

  In step S616, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the process timer by -1. When the process timer times out (when the value becomes 0), the process data is switched (steps S617 and S618). That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer, and the rendering device (variable) is set based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The control state for the display device 9 or the like is changed.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command when the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is varied, If the background symbol corresponding to the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol has been changed, it is confirmed whether or not a first variation pattern command) has been received (step S620). If it has been received, step S630 is received. Migrate to

  If the change of the background symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is started by receiving the second variation pattern command during the variation of the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, the effect control micro In step S620, the computer 100 further determines whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received.

  In step S630, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the background symbol (if the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is changed, the background symbol A, the second special symbol, and the second symbol). When the background symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is changed, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B) is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the big hit symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S633. If the jackpot symbol has not been determined, the value of the total variation time timer (corresponding to the remaining time of the variation time of the background symbol) is compared with the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command. (Step S631). If the value of the total variation time timer is larger, the process proceeds to step S633. If the variation time of the decorative pattern variation pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is longer (longer), the process proceeds to step S631a.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol (for example, background symbol A) already executed is determined as the big hit symbol by the process of step S630, the variation of the background symbol A Will be continued. In this case, there is a case where the decoration pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is later at the end of variation than the decoration pattern corresponding to the variation of the background pattern A that has been executed. In this embodiment, in such a case, when the variation of the background symbol A is finished, the variable display device 9 performs an effect related to the big hit game. Then, while the big hit game is being executed, the measurement of the variation time of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B (in this example, the second decorative symbol) is interrupted. Thereafter, when the big hit game ends, measurement of the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) is resumed. However, even if measurement of the variation time of the second decorative symbol is resumed, for example, the variation of the background symbol B corresponding to the variation of the second decorative symbol is not resumed. Note that the change of the second design may be resumed and the change of the background design may be resumed.

  When the variation time of the decorative pattern variation pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is longer, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the newly received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command (command 8004) designated by jackpot. (H) to 8006 (H), 8014 (H) to 8016 (H)) is checked (step S631a). If it is a big hit designation variation pattern command, the display result reception time measurement timer is started (step S631b) and the symbol reset execution flag is set (step S631c). Then, control goes to a step S637.

  In the processing after step S637, when the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is longer, the variation of the background symbol is changed to that of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command. Control for switching to a variation corresponding to the variation (variation of background symbol B) is performed. Specifically, first, the background symbol is temporarily stopped (step S637), and the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is set in the overall variation time timer (step S638).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects a background symbol variation pattern having a variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer (step S642). The background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S642 is No. 1 (in the case of normal fluctuation), No. 1 4 * (when the fluctuation time is 20 seconds), No. 6 * (when the variation pattern is 30 seconds) or No. 8 * (when the variation time is 40 seconds). In this embodiment, when a new variation pattern command is received after the switching point, it is determined whether or not the background symbol variation is switched immediately. When the variation time indicated by the new variation pattern command is longer, the background Although the change of the symbol is switched, the control may be performed so that the change of the background symbol can be switched only at the switching point. By performing such control, the background symbol can be switched more naturally. In addition, when a plurality of switching points are provided in advance and the background symbol has a long variation time, when any new variation pattern command is received, one of the switching points that have not yet elapsed The background design may be switched with.

  Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S643). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S644). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S645).

  In step S633, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) determined in step S620 is a big hit symbol. Determination is made (step S633). If it is not a big hit symbol, the process ends. If it is a big hit symbol, a background symbol stop request flag is set (step S636).

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time corresponds to the jackpot display time (the value of the jackpot display time set in step S354 in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 21). , Corresponding to the value of the jackpot display time set in the process corresponding to the process of step S354). In other words, it is the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the big hit game is started.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the display result reception time measurement timer (step S636a) and sets the symbol reset execution flag (step S636b).

  60 and 61 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of variable display of the background symbols on the background symbol display unit 9c in the variable display device 9. FIG. In this embodiment, it is possible to display the decorative symbols in parallel on the two decorative symbol display units, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. In FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). In FIGS. 60 and 61, arrows as decorative symbols and background symbols indicate that decorative symbols and background symbols are changing. As described above, the display effects as illustrated in FIGS. 60 and 61 are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In FIG. 60, at the time of (1), the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is executed in parallel on both the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. In addition, the background symbol display unit 9c performs variable display of the background symbol corresponding to either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. As shown in (2), the variable display (variation) of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a ends and stops before the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. A symbol (outlier symbol) is derived and displayed. When the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol can be started. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the next variable display. Is determined (steps S1509 and S1510). Assume that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  Thereafter, an example is shown in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b is finished, a stop symbol is derived, and a new variable display is started ((3), (4)). . In this embodiment, the variable display started from the point (4) is determined to be out of force. Note that the variable display started from the time point (8) is also determined to be out of force.

  At the time of (9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display unit 9a is finished, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the background symbol display unit 9c. . Then, the background symbol display unit 9c performs a display for notifying the big hit (see (10)). At that time, if the second decorative design variable display is performed in the second decorative design display portion 9b, the variable display of the second decorative design in the second decorative design display portion 9b is performed as shown in (9). The measurement is interrupted (see steps S1845 and S1846 in FIG. 43 (however, in steps S1845 and S1846, “second” is read as “first” and “first” is read as “second”)). Thereafter, it is shown that the jackpot game is being executed ((11) to (12)). FIG. 61 shows an example in which the measurement of the variable display of the second decorative symbol is resumed when the big hit game ends (see (13), steps S1850 and S1851 in FIG. 43 (however, step S1850). , S1851, “second” is read as “first”, and “first” is read as “second”).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the background symbol stop process (step S903). In the background symbol stop process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the big hit symbol of the background symbol has already been derived and displayed (step S1870). If it is already derived and displayed, the process proceeds to step S1878. When the big hit symbol of the background symbol is not derived and displayed, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the background symbol that has been changed is set as the big hit symbol (step S1872). For example, when the background symbol is changed corresponding to the change of the first decorative symbol, when the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is a big hit symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is also a big hit symbol. When the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the jackpot symbol on the background symbol display unit 9c (step S1873). In step S1873, the production control microcomputer 100 does not switch the background symbol variation, or if the new variation pattern command received during the background symbol variation does not specify a big hit. , The stop symbol determined in step S934 is derived and displayed, but if the new variation pattern command received during the variation of the background symbol specifies a big hit, it is not the stop symbol determined in step S934, Control is performed so that the stop symbol of the background symbol determined in step S613y is derived and displayed.

  In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the probability variation big hit symbol determination table in step S932 or S613n, and when the probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S934 or step S613y, In step S1873, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a big hit symbol. Further, when the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected in step S933 or S613x and the non-probable variable symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S934 or S613y, the non-probable variable symbol is determined as the big hit symbol in step S1873. Is derived and displayed. Further, when it is determined in step S911 or S613b that the command reception flag is not set and it is determined in step S913 or S613d that the display result reception time measurement timer has timed out (that is, the first display result command or the second display result). When the command reception is unsuccessful), the non-probable variation symbol is determined in step S934 or S613y based on the normal big hit symbol determination table selected in step S933 or S613x. Further, when it is determined as N in Steps S915 to S917 or Steps S613f to S613h (that is, when the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be correctly received due to garbled data or the like, or the variation pattern command When the specified content and the specified content of the display result command cannot be matched), the uncertain variable symbol is determined in step S934 or S613y based on the normal big hit symbol determining table selected in step S933 or S613x. The In step S1873, an uncertain variable symbol is derived and displayed as a big hit symbol.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines Y in step S1815 or step S951b (determines that the sudden probability variation big hit is designated), and determines the sudden probability variation big hit symbol as the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S1821 or step S951g. If YES in step S1873, a sudden probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the big hit symbol in step S1873. In addition, even when reception of the first display result command or the second display result command designated suddenly with a sudden probability variation jackpot has failed, when the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command designated with a sudden probability variation jackpot is received. In step S1815 or step S951b, Y is determined. In step S1821 or step S951g, the sudden probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the background symbol stop symbol, and in step S1873, the sudden probability variable big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the big hit symbol.

  Further, if it is determined as Y in step S1817 or step S951d (determined as a small hit designation) and the same symbol as the suddenly probable big hit symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S1821 or step S951g, In S1873, the same symbol as the probability variation big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the small hit symbol. In addition, even when reception of the first display result command or the second display result command designated by the small hit is failed, when the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command designated by the small hit is received, the step In step S1817 or step S951d, Y is determined. In step S1821 or step S951g, the same symbol as the sudden probability variable big hit symbol is determined as the background symbol stop symbol. In step S1873, the same symbol as the sudden probability variable big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Will do.

  When the background symbol stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the background symbol stop request flag is set (step S1874). If the background symbol stop request flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the background symbol stop request flag (step S1875), and proceeds to step S1873 to derive the jackpot symbol on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (see step S1873). If the background symbol stop request flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the shifted symbol on the background symbol display unit 9c (step S1876), and displays the background symbol process flag in the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S1876). The value is updated according to step S900) (step S1877).

  When the jackpot symbol of the background symbol has already been derived and displayed in step S1870, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the fanfare flag has been set (step S1878). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S1878), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the small hit effect flag is set (step S1878a). On the other hand, if the small hit effect flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the sudden probability big hit effect flag is set (step S1878b). If neither of the sudden probability change big hit effect flag and the small hit effect flag is set, the fanfare effect for big hit is selected based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S1879). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare production selected in step S1879 (step S1880).

  If the sudden probability change big hit effect flag is set (Y in step S1878b), the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for sudden probability change big hit (step S1878e).

  If the small hit effect flag is set (Y in step S1878a), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit display time measurement timer for measuring the execution time of the fanfare effect at the time of the small hit (step S1878a). S1878d), the process proceeds to step S1878e, and the same process data as the process data corresponding to the fanfare effect for the sudden probability variation big hit is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the fanfare effect is executed using the same process data in the case of sudden probability big hit and small hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a process timer (step S1881). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 updates the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S1882).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S904) in the background symbol process. In the big hit display process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the small hit effect flag is set (step S2900). If the small hit effect flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2902. If the small winning effect flag is not set, the effect controlling microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open display command has been received is set (step S100). S2901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S2901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2902). The display time measurement timer value is decremented by 1 (step S2902a). Next, when the small hit display time measurement timer is set, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the small hit display time measurement timer has timed out (step S2902b). For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the determination in step S2902b only when the small hit effect flag is set, and if the small hit effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2903. To do. Therefore, in cases other than small hits, Yes is not determined in the process of step S2902b. If timed out, the process proceeds to step S2902c, and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (step S900) (step S2902c).

  When the small hit display time measurement timer is not set, or when the small hit display time timer has not timed out, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect device (variable display device 9, Control of the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S2903). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may confirm whether or not the content of the symbol / production designation command (display result command) matches the content of the fanfare command. The effect control microcomputer 100 displays a specific symbol (“???”) as a jackpot display symbol when the symbol / effect designation command and the fanfare command do not match. May be.

  Even if the production control microcomputer 100 receives a fanfare command with the same probability variation jackpot as the fanfare command, it differs depending on which of commands A002 (H) to A005 (H) is received. The fanfare production is executed. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays different characters or different characters on the variable display device 9, thereby executing different presentations.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S2905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2906).

  When the big prize opening opening flag is set (Y in step S2901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect during the round (rounding according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening opening display command. An effect for executing display is selected (step S2907). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects a normal effect during the round. Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S2908), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S2909). Then, the process timer is started (step S2910), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S905) (step S2911).

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are flowcharts showing the in-round processing (step S905) in the background symbol process. In the in-round processing, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S1901). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S1901), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the flag for opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command for opening the big prize opening has been received is set. Is confirmed (step S1902).

  When the flag after the special winning opening is not set (N in Step S1902), the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set during the round (Step S1903). If the re-lottery execution flag during the round is not set (N in Step S1903), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1904), and the production device (variable) according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1905). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S1907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1908).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1902 (Y in step S1902), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after opening the big prize opening. The effect of performing the interval display is selected (step S1909). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S1910), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S1911). Then, the process timer is started (step S1912), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S906) (step S1913). Note that if the game is suddenly probable, the production control microcomputer 100 switches to process data in accordance with the interval production in step S1911 even if it receives a display command after opening the big prize opening. Control to not.

  When the ending flag is set in step S1901 (Y in step S1901), it is when an ending command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the received ending command is an ending command (command A301 (H)) for designating a probable big hit (step S1914). If it is an ending command that designates a probable big hit, it is checked whether the display result non-reception flag or the display result irregular reception flag is set (step S1915). If it has been set, it is confirmed whether or not a promotion notification flag indicating that notification has been made that the promotion has been made to probable has already been set (step S1916). As will be described later, the promotion notification flag is set based on the notification that the promotion has been promoted to certainty in the re-lottery effect (see step S1935). If the promotion notification completed flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a big lottery re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery production is executed in the ending production after the big hit (step S1917). Further, based on the value of the jackpot symbol determination random number, the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol corresponding to the jackpot is determined (step S1920). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a probability variation symbol as a jackpot symbol based on the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the determined background symbol stop symbol in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and proceeds to step S1921.

  When the received ending command is not an ending command that specifies a probable jackpot, when neither the display result non-reception flag nor the display result irregular reception flag is set, or when the promoted notification flag is already set The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set (step S1918). If it is set, it is confirmed whether or not the promotion notification flag is set (step S1919). If the promotion notification flag is not set, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol corresponding to the jackpot based on the value of the jackpot symbol determining random number (step S1920). . In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a probability variation symbol as a jackpot symbol based on the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the determined background symbol stop symbol in the background symbol storage area in the RAM, and proceeds to step S1921.

  When the big lottery re-lottery execution flag has not been set, or when the promotion notification flag has already been set, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1921.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects an ending effect according to the received ending command (step S1921). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the ending flag (step S1922), and selects process data corresponding to the ending production (step S1923). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the production period measurement timer and also starts the process timer (step S1924). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S907) (step S1925). If execution of the big lottery re-lottery effect is specified by the ending command, a longer effect period is set in step S1924 than when the normal ending effect is executed, and the effect period measurement timer is started. . For example, in step S1924, if the re-lottery effect after big hit is not executed, 10 seconds is set as the effect period, and if the re-lottery effect after big hit is executed, 20 seconds is set as the effect period.

  If the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in step S1903, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the current round is a re-lottery effect execution round (for example, round 10) (step S1903). S1926). In this case, for example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 determines how many rounds it currently has based on the content of the special winning opening open display command (command A1XX (H) shown in FIG. 12) received from the game control microcomputer 560. It is specified whether it is. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the specified current round is an execution round of the re-lottery effect by determining whether or not the specified current round matches a predetermined execution round (for example, round 10). To check. If it is not the re-lottery effect execution round, the process proceeds to step S1904. Instead of predetermining the re-lottery effect execution round, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the re-lottery effect execution round by lottery using a predetermined execution round determination random number. Also good.

  If it is an execution round of the re-lottery effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms the start time of the re-lottery effect recognizable from the EXT data of the display result command, and further confirms the value of the effect period measurement timer. Then, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of the production during the round has passed the start time (for example, 5 seconds) of the re-lottery production (step S1927). If the start time of the re-lottery effect has not yet elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1904.

  If the time after the start of the effect during the round has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S1927), the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize from the EXT data stored in the display result data storage area. By confirming the start time of the big hit symbol finalizing effect and checking the value of the effect period measurement timer, the time after the start of the effect during the round has passed the start time of the big hit symbol finalizing effect (for example, 10 seconds) It is determined whether or not there is (step S1928).

  If the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the effect period measurement timer. (Step S1929). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the re-lottery effect (step S1930), and sets the process timer set value in the selected process data as the process timer. Then, the process timer is started (step S1931). Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed in accordance with the contents of the process data of the re-lottery effect (step S1932). If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds directly to step S1932, and in accordance with the contents of the re-lottery effect process data, the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speakers). 27) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1928 that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot symbol determination effect by checking the value of the effect period measurement timer. It is determined whether it is in progress (step S1933). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data of the big hit symbol finalizing effect corresponding to the symbol arrangement reflecting the symbol determined in step S1979 ( Step S1934). If the symbol determined in step S1979 is a probability variation symbol (Y in step S1935), a promotion notification flag indicating that the symbol has been promoted to probability variation is set (step S1936). If it is not a probable variation symbol (N in step S1935), a non-elevation informed flag indicating that it has been informed that it has not been promoted to a probable variation is set (step S1937).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data in the process timer and starts the process timer (step S1938). In addition, as the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect, a plurality of process data having a symbol arrangement that can correspond to all combinations of symbols that can be determined are prepared in advance. Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect (step S1939). In this embodiment, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect execution round is performed in the post-round processing described later, either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the background symbol stop symbol (see step S1979). In step S1939, when the big hit symbol finalizing effect is executed, either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the big hit symbol fixed effect is being executed in step S1933, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1939 as it is and executes control of the directing device according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect. .

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (step S906) in the background symbol process. In the round post-processing, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S1971). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1972), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1973). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1974), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1975). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1976).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y of step S1971), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the re-lottery execution flag during round is set (step S1977). If the re-lottery execution flag during the round is set (Y in step S1977), the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S1978. If the round re-lottery execution flag is not set in step S1977, the process proceeds to step S1985.

  For example, when a display result command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect during the round is received, since the re-lottery execution flag during the round is set in step S613q or step S613v, it is determined as Y in step S1977 and step S1978. Migrate to In addition, when the display result command cannot be received or when the fanfare command specified with probability variation big hit is received after the display result command has failed to be received, the re-lottery execution flag during round is set in step S1626. In step S1977, Y is determined, and the process proceeds to step S1978.

  In step S1978, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the current round is a re-lottery production execution round (for example, round 10). In this case, for example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 determines how many rounds it currently has based on the content of the special winning opening open display command (command A1XX (H) shown in FIG. 12) received from the game control microcomputer 560. It is specified whether it is. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the specified current round is an execution round of the re-lottery effect by determining whether or not the specified current round matches a predetermined execution round (for example, round 10). To check. If it is not the re-lottery effect execution round, the process proceeds to step S1985.

  If it is an execution round of the re-lottery effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol based on the big hit symbol determining random number (step S1979). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol as the jackpot symbol. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the determined stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol in the background symbol storage area in the RAM. Then, control goes to a step S1985. In this embodiment, when either the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is determined in step S1979, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a jackpot symbol when the re-lottery effect is executed in the round process. There are cases where a non-probable variation is derived.

  In this embodiment, a case where a re-lottery effect is executed when it is determined in advance as a probable big hit is shown, but a re-lottery effect may also be executed when it is determined as a normal big hit. For example, when the change control command received in step S1807 determines that the variation pattern command received in step S1807 is a normal jackpot, or the display result command received in step S1839 determines that the presentation control microcomputer 100 is a normal jackpot, A lottery using a re-lottery determination random number may be performed to determine whether to execute a re-lottery effect. Further, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern command received in step S1807 is a normal jackpot, or determines that the display result command received in step S1839 is a normal jackpot. The re-lottery effect may be executed unconditionally. In the case where a normal lottery is pre-determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game round, in step S1979, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a non-probable variable symbol as the big hit symbol. To do. Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the round, control is performed so that the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In the case where a normal lottery is pre-determined and a re-lottery effect is executed in the ending after the big hit game, in step S1920, which will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses a non-probable variable symbol as the big hit symbol. To decide. Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending, control is performed so that the non-probable variation symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol.

  If the round is finished in a short time when the re-lottery effect is executed during the round, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute the re-lottery effect across a plurality of rounds. . In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may update only the display of the number of rounds when the rounds are switched, and may continue the re-lottery effect. For example, when starting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the round, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect executing flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is being executed. If the flag for opening the big prize opening is set in step S1902, the performance control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the re-lottery effect execution flag is set. If the re-lottery effect execution flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect after step S1926 without shifting to the interval effect after step S1909. Thereafter, when the next round starts and the flag after opening the big prize opening is reset, the production control microcomputer 100 determines in step S1902 that the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set, and in step S1903. If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery effect after step S1926 is executed. Then, in the re-lottery effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms, for example, whether or not the large winning opening opening display command “A1XX” has been received. The number of rounds to be displayed on the variable display device 9 is updated based on the number of rounds specified in (1).

  In step S1985, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects an effect during the round (an effect of executing a round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command for opening the special prize opening (step S1985). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S1986), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S1987). Then, the process timer is started (step S1988), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S905) (step S1989).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S2971) and checks whether the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S2972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S2972), the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S2973), and is the big lottery re-lottery execution flag set? It is confirmed whether or not (step S2973a). If the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2974 as it is.

  If the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the start time of the re-lottery production recognizable from the EXT data of the display result command, and further confirms the value of the production period measurement timer. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the time after the start of the ending effect has passed the start time (for example, 5 seconds) of the re-lottery effect (step S2973b). If the start time of the re-lottery effect has not yet elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2974.

  If the time after the start of the ending effect has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S2973b), the effect control microcomputer 100 can be recognized from the EXT data stored in the display result data storage area. Whether the time after the start of the ending effect has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) by checking the value of the effect period measurement timer while checking the start time of the jackpot symbol determining effect Is determined (step S2973c).

  If the start time of the big hit symbol determination effect has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the effect period measurement timer. (Step S2973d). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data for the re-lottery effect (step S2973e), and sets the process timer set value in the selected process data as the process timer. Then, the process timer is started (step S2973f). Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the contents of the process data of the re-lottery effect (step S2973g). If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2973g as it is and according to the contents of the re-lottery effect process data, the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speakers). 27) is executed. In step S2973g, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of re-variably displaying the background symbol as the re-lottery effect. The production control microcomputer 100 may perform display other than re-variation of the background symbol such as displaying a predetermined character on the variable display device 9 as the re-lottery effect. Then, for example, the probability change may be notified by displaying a sentence such as “probability big hit” as a character line.

  The production control microcomputer 100 executes the lottery re-lottery effect based on the reception of the display result command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect, the failure to receive the display result command, and the data Different production data (data with different production times of re-lottery effects) when executing a lottery effect after a big hit based on the receipt of an ending command that specifies a probable jackpot after failing to receive correctly due to a cause such as a ghost The lottery effect is executed using. For example, when performing a lottery effect after jackpot based on receiving an ending command with a probable jackpot after failing to receive a display result command, an effect with the same effect period as when performing a normal ending effect By executing the re-lottery effect using data, it is possible to match the ending time management performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side with the ending time management performed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. it can.

  If it is determined in step S2973c that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot symbol determination effect by checking the value of the effect period measurement timer. It is determined whether it is in progress (step S2973h). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the big hit symbol finalizing effect process data corresponding to the symbol arrangement reflecting the symbol determined in step S1920 ( Step S2973i).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the process timer set value in the selected process data in the process timer and starts the process timer (step S2973j). In addition, as the process data for the big hit symbol determination effect, a plurality of process data having a symbol arrangement that can correspond to all combinations of changed symbols are prepared in advance. Then, control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) is executed according to the content of the process data of the big hit symbol fixed effect (step S2973k). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the probability variation symbol as a jackpot symbol based on the background symbol determined in step S1920.

  If the big hit symbol determination effect is being executed in step S2973h, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step S2973k as it is, and executes the control of the effect device according to the contents of the process data of the big hit symbol determination effect. .

  In step S2974, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S2974). That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a normal ending effect when the re-lottery effect is not performed. For example, by displaying that the jackpot ends or by displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and displaying a sentence such as “See you!” As a character line, the jackpot ends. Is notified.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S2975), and switches the process data if the process timer has timed out (step S2976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2977).

  When the production period measurement timer times out (Y in step S2972), the production control microcomputer 100 resets predetermined flags such as the normal jackpot production flag and the probability variation jackpot production flag (step S2978), and the background symbol process flag. Is set to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S2979).

  In this embodiment, if a variation pattern command with a jackpot designation is received but the display result command cannot be received or if the display result command cannot be received correctly due to garbled data, the probability variation jackpot designation is performed. Based on the fact that the ending command was received, the case where the re-lottery effect was performed in the ending after the big hit was explained. May be. In addition, based on the fact that the fanfare command specified by the probability change jackpot is received, the case where the re-lottery effect is performed during the jackpot game round has been explained. You may make it alert | report that it was promoted to.

  Next, the effect aspect of the lottery symbol re-drawing effect executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a big lottery symbol re-lottering effect executed in the variable display device. In FIG. 68, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3) (4). Further, the display effect as illustrated in FIG. 68 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560.

  As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 has determined that a big hit is made in the big hit determination (steps S1509 and S1510). Further, it is assumed that it is determined that a promising big hit will be made, and that it is decided to execute a re-lottery effect during the big hit game round (step S1519). In response to this, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 has transmitted a probability variable jackpot designation command with re-lottery during the round to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 68, the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the big hit game will be described, but the same applies to the case where the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending after the big hit game.

  The production control microcomputer 100 receives the command for specifying a promiscuous big hit with re-lottery during the round, thereby setting a probable big hit effect flag (step S924) and sets a re-lottery execution flag during the round (step S925). Further, the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected (step S933), and the non-probable variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S934).

  As shown in FIG. 68 (1), when the variation time elapses after the variation of the background symbol (variable display) is started in the variable display device 9, the variation of the background symbol is stopped and the uncertain variation determined in step S934. The symbol jackpot symbol (stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in (1), the non-probability variable symbol “222” is stopped and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state, and when a predetermined re-lottery effect execution round (round 10 in this example) is reached (Y in step S1977, Y in step S1978), it is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. A stop symbol (probability variation symbol) of the background symbol is determined (step S1979). When the re-lottery effect is executed not only during the round but also in the ending after the big hit, the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the background symbol. Then, the re-lottery effect for the big hit symbol is started (Y in step S1918, N in step S1919).

  When the big win symbol re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the background symbols on the left middle right start to change (steps S1926 to S1932). When the re-lottery effect is executed, the variation of the background symbol may be started after temporarily displaying the non-probable variation symbol shown in FIG. 68 (1).

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the big hit symbol determination effect (Y in step S1927, Y in step S1928), the big hit symbol determination effect is started (steps S1933 to S1939). In the jackpot symbol determination effect, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the jackpot display symbol (probability variation symbol) determined in step S1979 in the variable display device 9 is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the probability variation symbols “777” on the left middle right are displayed in a state where they are aligned. Then, as shown in (4), it is displayed that the probability change jackpot has been confirmed, and after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, the case where the left middle right background symbol is re-varied in the re-lottery effect has been described. . For example, in the re-drawing effect, the production control microcomputer 100 may cause a predetermined character to appear on the display screen of the variable display device 9 and notify that the character has been promoted according to the type of the character to be introduced. You may display the sentence to the effect that it was promoted to a certain probability as a line.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, the background symbol display unit 9 c of the variable display device 9 has been described as performing a re-lottery effect by changing the background symbol again. However, the first decorative symbol display unit of the variable display device 9 is described. The re-lottery effect may be executed using 9a or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. In this case, for example, when the time after the start of the round (or after the start of the ending effect) has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (see steps S1927 and S2973b), the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the first decorative symbol display unit 9a. The first decorative design may be changed again, or the second decorative design of the second decorative design display portion 9b may be changed again. When the start time of the jackpot finalizing effect elapses (see steps S1928 and S2973c), the first decorative symbol display unit 9a displays the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b displays the second decorative symbol. A symbol stop symbol may be displayed.

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 and the execution timing of the effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 69 is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the effect when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. In FIG. 69, when the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is normally received by the effect control microcomputer 100 when it is determined that the game is a big hit (in this example, a promising big hit). Indicates. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the case where the display result of variable display of the first special symbol out of two special symbols is described as a jackpot, but the display result of variable display of the second special symbol is set as a jackpot. Is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the first special symbol normal process (step S300) is performed every time there is a start winning in the first start winning port 13 and variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a. , The symbol / effect designation command (display result command) according to the determination result of the big hit determination, the determination result of the normal big hit or the probable big hit (whether it becomes the probable big hit), and the determination result of whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Specifically, when the determination result of the big hit determination is “out of”, the first off designation command is transmitted as the first display result command. When the determination result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, if the determination result of the normal big hit or the probability variation big hit is “normal big hit”, the first normal big hit designation command is transmitted. When the decision result of whether or not the normal big hit or the probable big hit is “probable big hit”, the first probable big hit designation command is used when the decision result of whether or not the re-lottering effect is executed is “non-execution of the re-lottery effect” Is sent. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect is “Execution of the re-lottery effect”, the probable big hit designation command with the re-lottery effect during the first round and the probable big hit designation with the re-lottery effect after the first big hit A command and a probable jackpot designation command with a first re-lottery effect are transmitted. Further, when it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is determined, a first sudden probability change big hit designation command is transmitted. When it is determined that a small hit is made, a first small hit designation command is transmitted.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to be out of play, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops display on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a of the variable display device 9 based on the first variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. The stop symbol of the background symbol to be stopped and displayed in the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol display unit 9c is selected. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to be a big hit, and when the first variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is received, the symbol / effect designation command from the game control microcomputer 560 is received. Based on the (first display result command), a probable variable symbol or a non-probable variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Then, in the first variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbol is determined using a predetermined variation pattern determination table, and the first variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is produced. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the first variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the first decorative symbol (variable display) in the variable display device 9 and the background symbol of the background symbol. Start fluctuation. As described above, the variation of the first decorative symbol in the variable display device 9 is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a.

  Thereafter, in the first special symbol variation process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 measures the variation time of the first special symbol and performs variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. Control is performed (steps S301 to S303). When the variation time of the first decorative symbol elapses, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is stopped in the first missed symbol stop process (step S303) or the first big hit symbol stop process (step S304). At the same time, a first decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. When the determination result in the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a fanfare command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a big hit of 15 rounds using effect devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c. A fanfare effect for informing the player of this fact is executed for a predetermined period. For example, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit symbol of the background symbol (such as “222” or “777”), and also displays a character (“big hit!”) Or the like indicating that it has been a big hit. Further, a sound effect when the big hit is made from the speaker 27 is emitted, or the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are turned on in a lighting pattern when the big hit.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305), measurement of the big hit display time (the time from when the big hit symbol is stopped to the start of the first round of big hit) is measured. To start. When the big hit display time has elapsed, when a big hit of 15 rounds is started, a display command for opening the big prize opening is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. The display state of the variable display device 9 in each round is designated by the display command for opening the big prize opening. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. As a result, the first round in the big hit game starts.

  The presentation control microcomputer 100 uses the presentation device such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command for opening the big prize opening from the gaming control microcomputer 560. A round effect (round display) for notifying the player that the current round is in progress is executed. For example, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit symbol (such as “222” or “777”) of the background symbol, and also displays a character indicating the current round (“first round”), other characters, and the like. Further, a sound effect during the round is emitted from the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are lit in the lighting pattern during the round.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, measurement of the round time for 15 rounds is started in the special winning opening opening process (step S306). Further, every time the count switch 23 is detected to be turned on, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1, thereby counting the number of winning balls to the big winning opening. Also, a count number designation command for designating the count number is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. When the first display result command specifying execution of the re-lottery effect during the big hit game round is received, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery effect during the round) is executed during the round of the big hit game. .

  When the round time has elapsed or when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the large winning opening. Thus, the first round during the big hit game is completed. At this time, since the number of rounds is not 15, a display command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The production control microcomputer 100 uses the production devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command after the special winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560. An interval effect (interval display) for notifying the player that the interval is within a predetermined period is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measuring the interval time (the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round) in the first grand prize opening pre-processing (step S307). When the interval time elapses, a special winning opening open display command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening.

  The above first pre-opening opening process, first open pre-opening process, and post-first post-opening process are repeatedly executed until the 15th round.

  When the value of the round number counter becomes 15 in the post-opening process of the first big winning opening, an ending command according to whether or not the probability variable big hit flag is set and whether each re-lottery flag is set Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect display devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c to end the big hit. An ending effect (a jackpot end display) to notify the person is executed for a predetermined period. For example, the variable display device 9 displays a character indicating the end of the big hit (“See you again!”), A character indicating that the state has shifted to the probability change state (“probability!”), Or the like, or the speaker 27 from the ending effect. For example, or the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are lit in a lighting pattern for an ending effect.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the first jackpot end process (step S308), the measurement of the jackpot end time (the execution time of the ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot) is started. When the first display result command specifying execution of the re-lottery effect at the ending after the end of the big hit is received, the re-lottery effect (re-lottery effect after the big hit) is executed in the ending effect. When the big hit end time elapses, predetermined flags (big hit flag, probability variation big hit flag, re-lottery flag) are set / reset. Then, the process returns to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the variation of the first special symbol is started.

  Next, among the effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 when the jackpot is determined, the effect control command when the first display result command cannot be correctly received due to data corruption or the like. The transmission timing will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command and the execution timing of the effect when the first display result command cannot be correctly received due to data corruption.

  The display control means (production control microcomputer 100) receives the first specific display variable display command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)), and then receives the first variable display section by the first predetermining means. The first display that can determine that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific display result (big hit symbol) and that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (probable big hit) The result command (commands 8C02 (H) to 8C05 (H)) or the first pre-determining means determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result (big hit symbol) And a first display result command (command 8C01 (H)) that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (usually a big hit) is determined. Outside predetermined commands (for example, a first display result command garbled, a first effect storage information designation command to be received next to the first display result command, an effect control command for designating a variable display of the second decorative symbol When the first display result command with sudden probability variation jackpot designation is not transmitted after the first specific display variable display command, the first display result command with sudden probability variation jackpot designation may be received). Based on the elapse of the first variable display time, a non-special display result (non-probable variable symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  The display control means (production control microcomputer 100) receives the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H)) and then receives the second variable display section by the second predetermining means. The second display capable of specifying that it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific display result (big hit symbol) and that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (probable big hit) The result command (commands 8C12 (H) to 8C15 (H)) or the second pre-determining means determines that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is the specific display result (big hit symbol) And a second display result command (command 8C11 (H)) that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (usually a big hit) is determined. Outside predetermined commands (for example, a second display result command that is garbled, a second effect storage information designation command to be received next to the second display result command, an effect control command that designates a variable display of the first decorative symbol When the second display result command with sudden probability variation jackpot designation is not transmitted after the second specific display variable display command, the second display result command with sudden probability variation jackpot designation may be received). Based on the elapse of the second variable display time, a non-special display result (non-probable variable symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, although the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the first variation pattern command of the probability variation big hit / normal big hit designation from the game control microcomputer 560, the garbled symbol / effect designation command (first (Display result command) is received (see steps S1835 to S1838). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a display result irregular reception flag (see step S1838). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the big hit is made by the first variation pattern command, so the normal big hit symbol determination table is selected and the first decorative symbol stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) and A stop symbol (non-probability variable symbol) of the background symbol is determined (see steps S1841, S1842, S933, and S934). Then, the stop symbol (non-probability variable symbol) of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol (non-probability variable symbol) of the background symbol are derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 (see steps S2871 and S1873).

  When it is determined in advance that the probability variation jackpot will be made, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the fanfare command designated by the probability variation jackpot. In this case, if the display result irregular reception flag is set (see step S1624), the effect control microcomputer sets the re-lottery execution flag during the round (step S1626), and executes the re-lottery effect execution round (for example, In round 10), the re-lottery effect is executed and the probability variation symbol or the non-probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed (see steps S1926 to S1939). In the example shown in FIG. 70, it is assumed that the uncertain variable symbol is stopped and displayed in the re-drawing effect during the round.

  In addition, when it is determined in advance that the probability variation jackpot will be made, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives an ending command designating the probability variation jackpot. In this case, if the display result irregular reception flag is set (see step S1915), the effect control microcomputer sets the re-lottery execution flag after the big hit (step S1918), and in the ending effect after the big hit ends, A re-lottery effect is executed and the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed (see steps S2973a to S2973k). In addition, when it is informed that the promotion has already been promoted in the re-lottery effect during the round, control is performed so that the re-lottery effect after the big hit is not executed based on the fact that the promotion notification flag has been set (step S1916). reference).

  The display control means (production control microcomputer 100) is based on the fact that the first variable display time has elapsed when the first variable display command (command 8007 (H)) specified by sudden probability change big hit is received. As a specific display result (big hit symbol), a display result for sudden probability variable big hit (sudden probability variable big hit symbol) different from the special display result (probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c). .

  Further, the display control means (production control microcomputer 100) is based on the fact that the second variable display time has elapsed when the second variable display command (command 8017 (H)) specified by sudden probability change big hit is received. As a specific display result (big hit symbol), a display result for sudden probability variable big hit (sudden probability variable big hit symbol) different from the special display result (probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c). .

  Further, the display control means (the production control microcomputer 100) receives the first variable display command (command 8007 (H)) specified by the sudden probability change big hit, and then suddenly changes the big win as the specific gaming state by the first predetermining means. Predetermined commands other than the first display result command (command 8C06 (H)) that can be specified to be changed to the gaming state (for example, the first display result command garbled or the first display result command When the first effect storage information designation command to be received next and the effect control command for designating the variable display of the second decorative symbol are received, the specific display result (big hit) is based on the elapse of the first variable display time. As a design), the display result (sudden probability change big hit symbol) for sudden probability change big hit that is different from the special display result (probability change symbol) Out derivation is displayed on the display unit (background symbol display section 9c).

  The display control means (production control microcomputer 100) receives the second variable display command (command 8017 (H)) specified by the sudden probability change big hit, and then suddenly changes the big hit as the specific gaming state by the second predetermining means. Predetermined commands other than the second display result command (command 8C16 (H)) that can be determined to be shifted to the gaming state (for example, the second display result command that is garbled, the second display result command When a second effect storage information designation command to be received next and an effect control command for designating the variable display of the first decorative symbol are received, the specific display result (big hit) is based on the elapse of the second variable display time. As a design), the display result (sudden probability change big hit symbol) for sudden probability change big hit that is different from the special display result (probability change symbol) Out derivation is displayed on the display unit (background symbol display section 9c).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command for designating the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, but the game control microcomputer 560 causes data corruption or the like. When the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be received correctly, an uncertain variable symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as a stop symbol for a decorative symbol or a background symbol. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the first display result command or the second display result command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the background symbol is displayed in the game. Can prevent the player from being disadvantaged more than necessary.

  For example, if the display result is not derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 because the first display result command or the second display result command has not been received despite being determined to be a big hit, the player can display the decorative design. And the display result of the fluctuation display of the background symbol cannot be recognized. For this reason, although it is a big hit, it is delayed to realize that it is a big hit, and there is a possibility that the player cannot sufficiently obtain the profit that should be originally obtained in the big hit gaming state. In a conventional gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-317092, the game control means separately uses an effect control command for designating a stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol to the effect control means. Send. Therefore, the effect control means cannot specify the display result when one of the effect control commands for designating the stop symbol of the left middle right background symbol cannot be received, and the initial appearance is not specified. It can only display symbols. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player cannot sufficiently obtain the profit that should be originally obtained in the big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, when the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command designating the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, it can be recognized that at least the big hit is made. Even if the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be received and it is not possible to recognize whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, the non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is at least a big hit, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged more than necessary.

  In this embodiment, a command indicating the stop symbol of the background symbol is not transmitted separately for each symbol, but one first display result command or second symbol indicating the display result (big hit or miss) of the variable display. Send the display result command. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can determine whether or not it is a big hit based on one first display result command or second display result command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation example of the effect control means when the display result command and the decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received correctly. 71 shows an example of the operation when the first display result command and the first decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be correctly received. However, the second display result command and the second decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be correctly received. The same applies to the case. That is, in FIG. 71, if “first” is read as “second”, an example of the operation of the effect control means when the second display result command or the second decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be correctly received will be described. That's right. In FIG. 71, a cross indicates that the corresponding command has not been received or has not been correctly received due to data corruption or the like. A circle indicates that the corresponding command has been received correctly.

  As shown in FIG. 71, when the first variation pattern command for specifying the deviation is received, but the first display result command is not correctly received, the first decorative symbol and the background symbol are changed, and the first variation pattern command is started. Based on the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command or the fact that the variable time timer has timed out, the variable symbols are derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol.

  When the first variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is received and the first display result command for normal big hit is received, the first decorative symbol and the background symbol change are started. Based on the reception of the stop designation command or the time-out of the variable time timer, the variable display device 9 derives and displays a non-probable variation symbol as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol.

  When the first variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is received and the first display result command for the probable big hit is received, the variation of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol is started, and the first decorative symbol is started. Based on the receipt of the stop designation command or the fact that the variable time timer has timed out, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol. In addition, when execution of the re-lottery effect during the round and the re-lottery effect after the big hit is designated by the received first display result command, even if the first display result command of the probability variable big hit designation is received, Based on the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command or the fact that the variation time timer has timed out, the variable display device 9 derives and displays the non-probable variable symbol as the stopped symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol. Then, a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game round or at the end of the big hit game.

  If the first variation pattern command for both probabilistic big hit / normal big hit is received, but the first display result command is not received correctly, the first decorative design and the background design change and the first decorative design stops. Based on the reception of the designation command or the time-out of the variable time timer, the variable display device 9 derives and displays a non-probable variable symbol as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol. That is, since it is possible to identify at least the big hit, the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed. Even if the first display result command specifies execution of a re-lottery effect during a round or a re-lottery effect after a big hit, the first design symbol stop designation command has been received or the variable time timer has timed out. Based on the above, the variable display device 9 derives and displays a non-probable variable symbol as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol. However, since it is not possible to specify whether or not the execution of the re-lottery effect is specified, the re-lottery effect cannot be executed based on the first display result command. In this case, since a fanfare command and an ending command for specifying the probability variation jackpot are received, the re-lottery effect is executed during the round of the jackpot game based on the fanfare command for designating the probability variation jackpot. Further, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending after the big hit based on the ending command for designating the probable big hit.

  If the first variation pattern command specified suddenly probable big hit is received, but the first display result command is not correctly received, the first decorative design and background design change starts, the first decorative design stop designation command Is received or the variable time timer has timed out, the variable probability display device 9 is suddenly derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol. When the first variation pattern command specified by the small hit is received, but the first display result command is not correctly received, the first decorative symbol and the background symbol are started to change, and the first decorative symbol stop designation command is issued. Based on the fact that it has been received or the variable time timer has timed out, the variable display device 9 has a small hit symbol as the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol (in this embodiment, the same symbol as the sudden probability variable big hit symbol) Is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 71, when the production control microcomputer 100 can receive the first decorative symbol stop designation command, the first decorative symbol 100 is received based on the reception of the first decorative symbol stop designation command. The stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. If the first decorative symbol stop designation command cannot be received, the first decorative symbol and the background symbol stop symbol are derived and displayed based on the fact that the variable time timer has timed out.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the first ornament symbol display unit 9a, the second ornament symbol on the second ornament symbol display unit 9b is displayed. Suspend variable table time measurement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit symbol is derived and displayed at the same time on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b.

  Further, in this embodiment, after determining that the variable display display result of the first special symbol display unit 8a or the first decorative symbol display unit 9a is a big hit symbol, a specific period from the time when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Determines that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b is not a big hit symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first ornament symbol display unit 9a and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second ornament symbol display unit 9b. .

  For example, there is a conventional gaming machine equipped with a variable display device that can variably display two special symbols at the same time and variably displays one notification symbol as identification information according to the progress of variable display of the two special symbols ( For example, refer to JP-A-2005-185353). In such a gaming machine, when variable display of two special symbols is proceeding simultaneously, the notification symbol corresponding to one of the special symbols in the variable display device is based on the preset priority. The variable display is executed, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed when the variable display time (referred to as the fluctuation time) elapses. Also, when it is determined that both of the two special symbols will be a big hit (becomes a big hit symbol), in order to prevent the two special symbols from being a big hit at the same time, the special that is determined to be a big hit later It is configured to wait for the start of variable display of symbols. However, in such a gaming machine, since the variable symbol display itself that is determined to be a big hit later is not started, it is recognized in advance that a big hit will be caused by the fact that the change of the special symbol is not started. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started during the big hit, it is recognized in advance that the variation is out of place. In this way, the player (especially the player who is used to the game) will realize whether the game will be a big hit or not, depending on whether or not the two special symbols are changing at the same time. There is a problem of lowering. In this embodiment, if it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the first decorative symbol display unit 9a is the big hit symbol, the second special symbol display 8b or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b. Since the display result of the variable display is forcibly determined not to be a jackpot symbol, the specific display result is derived and displayed in the first variable display section, and the specific display result is derived in the second variable display section. It is possible to prevent the display from occurring at the same time, and it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that a display result that is not a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display unit.

  Further, in this embodiment, the total reserved memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number stored separately in the gaming machine is displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can recognize the total reserved memory number as the reserved memory number corresponding to the background symbol display unit 9c.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined based on the total number of reserved memories, which is the sum of the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is performed during variable display of either the first decorative symbol display unit 9a or the second decorative symbol display unit 9b, but the shortening variation is not performed during the other variable display. can do. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable due to a change in the variable display time even though the total reserved memory number is shown to the player as the reserved memory number corresponding to the background symbol display unit 9c. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command specified by sudden probability change big hit or a change pattern command specified by small hit is received, a combination of symbols called “chance eyes” (in this example, “123” or “357”). In the case where the symbols are displayed, this is not limited to these symbols), and during the period for controlling the opening of the big prize opening, the effect for suddenly probable big hit (for example, whether or not it is probable internally) Although a case where a state in which a special effect that cannot be recognized is executed (for example, an effect indicating a transition to a so-called chance time) is executed is shown, a sudden change variable command pattern or a small hit change is specified. The display mode when the pattern command is received is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays that the background symbol fades out from the display screen of the variable display device 9 after starting the variation of the background symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command, and stops the background symbol. Before the symbol is derived and displayed, an effect for probability variation big hit may be suddenly started. Then, even during the opening control of the big winning opening based on the sudden probability change big hit or the small hit, the effect for the sudden probability change big hit may be continued. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a background symbol called a chance eye on a part of the display screen of the variable display device 9 (for example, the end of the display screen) at the timing when the special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed. The combination may be derived and displayed, or the background symbols may not be displayed at all.

  Further, in this embodiment, a re-lottery informing that the player has been promoted to a probable change after shifting to the big hit gaming state by transmitting the first display result command or the second display result command designating execution of the re-lottery effect. Perform the production. By having such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation whether or not to be promoted to a certain probability for a long time, and to give excitement that it is not known when the re-lottery effect will be executed Can do. Even if the effect control command can be received normally, a re-lottery effect may be executed in the ending effect at the end of the big hit. On the other hand, it can be maintained for a long time.

  In this embodiment, the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game round and the ending effect at the end of the big hit game is shown, but it may be executed during the background symbol variation display. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100 a first variation pattern command or a second variation pattern command that designates whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect. Then, when receiving the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command designating execution of the re-lottery effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing during the variation of the background symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot gaming state is ended, compared with the case where it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not executed when the jackpot game state is ended. Thus, a long period is selected as the production period of the ending production. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ending effect is executed unnecessarily for a long time when the re-lottery effect is not executed when the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes a re-lottery effect for informing that the promotion has been promoted to the probability change based on the reception of the ending command designating the probability change big hit. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the first display result command or the second display result command, it is possible to notify that the promotion has been promoted to certainty. Therefore, the internal state and the display state of the gaming machine can be matched without increasing the control burden of the gaming control microcomputer 560. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a probable state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the player has been disadvantaged as compared with the case of notifying that the probability change is not actually made after notifying that the probability change has occurred.

  Further, in this embodiment, a re-lottery effect for informing that the player has been promoted to the probability change is executed based on the reception of the fanfare command designating the probability change big hit. With such a configuration, even when the production control microcomputer 100 cannot receive the first display result command or the second display result command, it is possible to notify that the promotion has been promoted to certainty. Therefore, the internal state and the display state of the gaming machine can be matched without increasing the control burden of the gaming control microcomputer 560. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a probable state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the player has been disadvantaged as compared with the case of notifying that the probability change is not actually made after notifying that the probability change has occurred.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when it is notified that the re-lottery effect has been promoted to a certain probability, the execution of the re-lottery effect is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the re-lottery effect is further executed even though it has been notified that the re-lottery effect has already been promoted.

  In this embodiment, the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command designated by the small hit is received, but the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be received from the gaming control microcomputer 560. When the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be received correctly due to a cause such as garbled data, the same display result as the sudden probability big hit is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9. Therefore, even when the same display result as the sudden probability change big hit is derived and displayed, it is possible to create a case of sudden transition to the probability variation state and a case of not transitioning, and to improve the interest of the game for the player .

  Further, in this embodiment, the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command designated suddenly by the probability variation big hit or the first fluctuation pattern command or the second fluctuation pattern command designated by the small hit is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Based on the above, the variable display of the background symbol of the variable display device 9 is executed using an effect pattern in which it is impossible to specify whether or not it is suddenly certain. Therefore, even when variable display is executed using the same production pattern, it is possible to create a situation that is internally probable and a situation that is not probable, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 has at least one of the first variation pattern command or the first display result command, or at least one of the second variation pattern command or the second display result command. Based on the above, at least a part of the contents of the game effect using the variable display device 9 (presence / absence of the notice effect or type of the notice effect) is determined. Therefore, the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 may further determine whether or not to change the effect mode. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect in different effect modes according to the type of the current game state. For example, according to whether or not the game state is a high base state, a game effect is performed in different effect modes. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using a predetermined effect change determination random number, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Is called. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines to change the effect mode when, for example, a predetermined effect change determination random number matches one predetermined value. Furthermore, when changing the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine which effect mode to change to by using a predetermined post-change effect determining random number.

  In this embodiment, the display result command (the first display result command or the second display result) is received after receiving the variation pattern command (the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command) for both the probability variation big hit / normal big hit. In the case where the uncertain variable symbol is derived and displayed when the command is not correctly received, the processing method when the rendering control command is not correctly received is limited to the one shown in this embodiment. Absent. For example, when a display result command for small hits is received despite suddenly receiving a variation pattern command for probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a small display result for variable display of decorative symbols. You may make it display a winning symbol (a symbol different from a sudden probability variation large winning symbol). The production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the specified content of the variation pattern command and the specified content of the display result command are consistent with each other, whether it is at least a big hit or a probable big hit. Then, it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit.

  The display result command (the first display result command or the second display result command) is received, but the specified content of the variation pattern command (the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command) and the specified content of the display result command If the two do not match, the production control microcomputer 100 may display the content specified in the display result command as it is, or display the content disadvantageous to the player for the time being, and then receive the You may display based on the designation | designated content of a control command (For example, a fanfare command and an ending command). For example, when the designation content of the variation pattern command and the designation content of the display result command do not match, the production control microcomputer 100 displays “out” for the time being, and then receives the production control command designating the jackpot May be displayed by replacing “out of” with “big hit”.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined flag when sudden probability big hit or small hit suddenly occurs (when a sudden variation designation or small hit designation variation pattern command or display result command is received), and suddenly When the background symbol variation display is performed after the probability variation big hit or the small hit is completed, the decorative symbol variation display may be executed using an effect pattern that cannot be specified whether or not the probability variation state is present. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a background color different from the probability variation state on the variable display device 9 or scrolls the background symbol in a direction different from the probability variation state, thereby changing the background symbol. The display may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display result command (the first display result command or the second display result command) for designating the sudden probability variation big hit is determined when the sudden probability variation big hit is determined is shown. The microcomputer 560 may transmit the same display result command as the display result command for designating a normal probability variation big hit (15-round probability variation big hit) even when it is suddenly determined as the probability variation big hit. Even in such a case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command (the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command) designating sudden probability variation big hit, for example, for sudden probability variation The jackpot symbol can be derived and displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the mode in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) and the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) can be executed at the same time has been described. The variable display of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) may be executed in the order of winning. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the variable display in which the first special symbol variable display execution condition is satisfied by winning the first start winning opening 13 but the variable display start condition is not yet satisfied. The number of times the condition is satisfied and the number of times that the variable display execution condition is satisfied, although the variable display execution condition for the second special symbol is satisfied by winning the second start winning opening 14, but the variable display start condition is not yet satisfied. Is stored in common. The special figure holding memory may include eight entries, and each entry may store a holding number, a random R value, and a value indicating the first special symbol or the second special symbol in association with each other. . Then, in step S1501 of the first special symbol normal process (or the second special symbol normal process), the game control microcomputer 560 executes the execution condition whose start condition is not satisfied. Only when the execution condition established earliest is the first execution condition (when the special figure holding memory stores a value indicating the first special symbol), a random number value is read from the special figure holding memory, etc. You may make it perform the process after step S1507. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special figure holding memory and a second special figure holding memory separately, and each entry has a holding number, a random R value, and a value indicating a winning order. May be stored in association with each other so that the winning order can be specified.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560, for example, in the second special symbol normal process (or the first special symbol normal process), the second reserved symbol number is not 0 (see step S1502). When the change is started, a second changing flag indicating that the second special symbol is changing may be set, and may be reset in the second missed symbol stop process or the second big hit end process. . Then, in the first special symbol process (or the second special symbol process), if the second changing flag is set, the process may not be shifted to steps S300 to S308. After the second changing flag is reset, if the second special symbol is not changing and the execution condition that is established first among the execution conditions in which the start condition is not established is the first execution condition The processes in steps S300 to S308 may be executed. Therefore, in this case, the first start condition is the first reserved memory number based on the fact that the winning prize among the currently memorized stored numbers is awarded to the first start winning opening 13, This is established when the previous variable display of one special symbol is completed and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. Further, the second start condition is the second reserved memory number based on the fact that the earliest winning among the stored memory numbers currently stored is won at the second start winning opening 14, and the second special symbol last time This is established when the variable display is completed and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a common variation pattern command and a common display result command for the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) and the second special symbol (second decorative symbol). You may make it do. In that case, before transmitting the variation pattern, it is only necessary to transmit a command that allows the display control means to recognize to which special symbol the variation this time corresponds. By doing so, the number of commands can be reduced by sharing the commands, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, before the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the variation pattern command and the display result command, the effect control command (variation designation) indicating whether the display is a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Command). For example, in the first variation pattern setting process (see step S301), the game control microcomputer 560 sends a first variation designation command indicating variable display corresponding to the first special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 100. Send.

  For example, in the command analysis process (see step S704), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the first variation designation flag when the command read in step S1613 is the first variation designation command. If the read command is a variation pattern command (see step S1614), if the first variation designation flag is set, the first variation pattern is saved in step S1615. If the read command is a display result command (see step S1618), if the first variation designation flag is set, the first display result reception flag is set as having received the first display result command. set.

  If comprised as mentioned above, since a change pattern command and a display result command can be made shared by the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) and the second special symbol (second decorative symbol), the game control micro The number of commands transmitted by the computer 560 can be reduced. Even when configured as described above, the gaming machine includes one liquid crystal display device (variable display device 9) and corresponds to each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. A first decorative symbol display unit 9a and a second decorative symbol display unit 9b. The first decorative symbol display unit 9 a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9 b are not provided as a part of the display area of the variable display device 9. You may implement | achieve with the simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) which can carry out variable display of the number. Further, for example, the first decorative symbol display unit 9 a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9 b may be realized by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) provided separately from the variable display device 9. In addition, the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b may be configured by a display such as a lamp or LED. Furthermore, the variable display device 9 may perform only the variable display of the background symbols without providing the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b.

  Moreover, when comprised as mentioned above, since the variable display of a 1st special symbol (1st decorative symbol) or a 2nd special symbol (2nd decorative symbol) is performed in order with a start winning, for example, In the case of starting winning a prize in the order of the first starting winning opening 13, the first starting winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, and the first starting winning opening 13, internally, the first decorative design, the first decorative design, The variable display is executed in the order of the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol, but in the background symbol display portion 9c, an apparently one background symbol is executed four times.

  Note that the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) is not variably displayed in the order in which the winning prizes are given. The change display of the special symbol (first decoration symbol) and the change display of the second special symbol (second decoration symbol) may be alternately performed. In addition, regardless of the order of starting winning prizes, either the variation display of the first special symbol (first decoration symbol) or the variation display of the second special symbol (second decoration symbol) may be preferentially executed. Good. For example, when the state is shifted to the high base state (that is, when the start winning opening 14 is open and easy to win), the variable display of the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) is executed. In the low base state (that is, when the start winning opening 14 is in the closed state and the starting winning opening 13 is easier to win), the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) changes. The display may be executed. Further, for example, when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the variable display of the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) is executed, and the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number. In some cases, the variable display of the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where one variable display device 9 is provided for the two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b has been described, but the gaming machine corresponds to each of the two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Two variable display devices may be provided. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes variable display of the first decorative symbol on the left middle right on the first variable display device in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, or the first variable. A re-lottery effect may be executed on the display device. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 performs variable display of the left, middle and right second decorative symbols on the second variable display device in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, or on the second variable display device. A re-lottery effect may be executed. In this case, the predetermined effect display unit includes a first variable display device that executes variable display of the first decorative symbol corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol, and a first variable display that corresponds to variable display of the second special symbol. This is realized by a second variable display device that executes variable display of two decorative symbols.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect control board 80 is used to control all effect means (the variable display device 9, the sound output device (speaker) 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c). However, each rendering means may be controlled using separate control boards. A second embodiment including a sound / lamp control board that controls the sound output device 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c and a symbol control board that controls the variable display device 9 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80b performs sound output control of the sound output device 27 and display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. The symbol control board 80a performs display control of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means includes a symbol control microcomputer 100a that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. This is realized by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In this embodiment, the display control means is realized by a symbol control microcomputer 100 a that controls the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b that controls the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c.

  The sound / lamp control board 80b is mounted with a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b including a sound / lamp control CPU 101b and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the sound / lamp control board 80b, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown).

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the sound / lamp controlling microcomputer 100b, the lamp driver 352, and the voice synthesis IC 173. Communication).

  The symbol control board 80a is equipped with a symbol control microcomputer 100a including a symbol control CPU 101a and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the symbol control board 80a, the symbol control microcomputer 100a operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a controls the display of the variable display device 9 using the LCD in the VDP (video display processor) 109 based on the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. To do.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The symbol control microcomputer 100 a outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the symbol control board 80a. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the symbol control microcomputer 100a, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100 a receives an effect control command via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to a strobe signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. .

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the symbol control board 80a. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the symbol control board 80a (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the symbol control board 80a to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, a signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in a direction toward the symbol control board 80a (a signal is not passed in the direction from the symbol control board 80a to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 72 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Moreover, the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines the contents of the effect to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (for example, the variation pattern command). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100 a determines whether or not to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9. For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a determines the type of the notice effect using the variable display device 9.

  Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a transmits an effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command) from the main board 31 to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a transmits the generated effect content designation command to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104.

  Note that the symbol control microcomputer 100a may add the determined contents (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the kind of the notice effect) to the effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command). . Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100 a may transmit an effect control command to which the effect content is added to the sound / lamp control board 80 b via the input / output port 104. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the first 3 bits in the EXT data of each variation pattern command (8000 (H) to 8019 (H)) are all “0”. When adding the effect contents to the variation pattern command, the symbol control microcomputer 100a adds, for example, a value capable of specifying the determined effect contents to the first 3 bits of the EXT data, and the sound / lamp control board. You may transmit to 80b.

  Next, the operation of the symbol control microcomputer 100a will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a according to the second embodiment. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a starts main processing. In the main process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval ( Step S781). Thereafter, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a shifts to a loop process for confirming monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S782). When a timer interrupt occurs, the symbol control microcomputer 100a sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a clears the flag (step S783) and executes the following symbol control process.

  A timer interrupt takes every 33 ms, for example. That is, the symbol control process is activated every 33 ms, for example. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific symbol control process is executed in the main process. However, the symbol control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  In the symbol control process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S784). In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a produces an effect according to the same process as the command analyzing process (command analyzing process executed by the effect controlling microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 36) shown in the first embodiment. Analyze control commands.

  Next, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs effect content determination processing (step S785). In the effect content determination process, the design control microcomputer 100a uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) to determine whether or not to perform the notice effect. , Type of notice effect). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content.

  Next, the design controlling microcomputer 100a performs the first decorative design process (step S787). In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a controls variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display unit 9a of the variable display device 9 according to the same processing as step S705A described in the first embodiment. To do. Next, the design controlling microcomputer 100a performs the second decorative design process (step S788). In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a controls the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b of the variable display device 9 according to the same process as step S705B described in the first embodiment. To do. Next, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs background symbol process processing (step S789). In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a controls the effect using the background symbol display unit 9c of the variable display device 9 according to the same processing as step S706 described in the first embodiment.

  Then, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a executes a process of updating the random number counter (step S790). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a process of sending the effect control command received from the main board 31 and the effect content designation command generated in the effect content determination process in step S785 to the sound / lamp control board 80b ( Command control processing: Step S791). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S782.

  In the command control process of step S791, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and can display the first variation pattern command. Control is performed to transmit the side variation pattern command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. The symbol control microcomputer 100a generates a second display-side variation pattern command that can specify the content of the second variation pattern command based on the reception of the second variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. / Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100b for lamp control is performed. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates a first display side display result command that can specify the contents of the first display result command based on the reception of the first display result command from the game control microcomputer 560. / Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100b for lamp control is performed. Furthermore, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates a second display-side display result command that can specify the content of the second display result command based on the reception of the second display result command from the game control microcomputer 560. / Control to transmit to the microcomputer 100b for lamp control is performed.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a transmits the first display-side variation pattern command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b only when the first variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Only when the second variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the second display-side variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Only when the first display result command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the first display side display result command is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Only when the second display result command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the second display side display result command is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b.

  Further, in the command control process of step S791, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may transmit the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 as it is to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. The control command may be processed and transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may recreate the variation pattern command and the display result command into one effect control command, and transmit it to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In this case, the design control microcomputer 100a can specify only the type and effect time of the effect to be executed during the variation of the decorative symbol and the background symbol based on the variation pattern command and the display result command, for example. Are newly generated and transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. With this configuration, the number of commands transmitted from the symbol control microcomputer 100a to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b can be reduced.

  An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to an interrupt terminal of the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, the design control microcomputer 100a is interrupted. Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes the effect control command reception process in the interrupt process. In the effect control command reception process, the symbol control microcomputer 100a stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process (step S785) shown in FIG. In the effect content determination process, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a checks whether the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S2851A).

  If the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is set, the symbol control microcomputer 100a specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command. Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines whether or not the variable display to be executed using the variable display device 9 is a variation accompanied by reach based on the identified variation pattern (step S2852A). For example, when the variation pattern indicated in the received variation pattern command is a pattern with reach (for example, the EXT data “01H” to “06H”, “11H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 16H ”), the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines that the variation is accompanied by reach. If the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is not set in step S2851A, the symbol control microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  When it is determined that the fluctuation is accompanied by reach, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the random number for determining the notice effect execution (random 1) (step S2853A). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9 when the random 1 matches a predetermined value. If the change is not accompanied by reach in step S2852A, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2854A that the notice effect is not performed, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the variation pattern command and the display result designation command when the variation pattern command is received and the display result designation command is received. The command is transferred to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, and the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes a game effect using the speaker and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. In this case, when it is determined in step S2854A that the notice effect is not performed, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates a notification command for designating that the notice effect is not performed, and transmits the notification command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b ( Step S2857A).

  If it is determined that the notice effect is to be performed (step S2854A), the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines the type of the notice effect to be performed using the variable display device 9, based on the notice effect type determination random number (random 2). (Step S2855A). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines whether the background symbol is changed at what speed in the notice effect based on the random number 2, and in which rotation direction the background symbol is changed. Decide which character to appear. If it is determined in step S2854A that the notice effect is not to be executed, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a ends the process as it is.

  Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a process of transmitting the produced effect content designation command to the sound / lamp control board 80b (step S2856A). The symbol control microcomputer 100a transfers (sends) the display result designation command and the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the sound / lamp control board 80b together with the effect content designation command. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b of the sound / lamp control board 80b is configured so that the speaker 27 and each lamp are based on the effect content designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern command received from the symbol control microcomputer 100a. A game effect using 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c is performed.

  In step S2856A, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may add the determined effect content to the variation pattern command or the display result specification command instead of generating the effect content specifying command. For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a adds the production content to the variation pattern command or the display result designation command by adding a value indicating the production content to the header portion of the command. In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the variation pattern command, or may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the display result designation command. Good. Furthermore, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portions of both the variation pattern command and the display result designation command. Then, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a may perform a process of transmitting a variation pattern command or a display result designation command to which the effect contents are added to the sound / lamp control board 80b. When the notice effect is not performed, the symbol control microcomputer 100a directly transfers the variation pattern command and the display result designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. It will be.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the address of the transmission table is set in step S2856A, the command control process (see step S791) in the symbol control main process is executed, so that the effect content designation command is sounded. / Sent to the lamp control board 80b.

  In this embodiment, in the effect content determination process, the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the content of the notice effect are determined. However, it may be determined whether to change the effect mode. . For example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs a game effect in different effect modes according to the type of the current game state. For example, according to whether or not the game state is a high base state, a game effect is performed in different effect modes. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using a predetermined effect change determination random number, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Is called. Note that the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines to change the effect mode when, for example, a predetermined effect change determination random number matches a predetermined value. Furthermore, when changing the effect mode, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may determine which effect mode to change to by using a predetermined post-change effect determining random number.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command designating the probability variation big hit / normal big hit is received, but for game control. When the first display result command or the second display result command cannot be correctly received from the microcomputer 560 due to garbled data or the like, an uncertain variable symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol or the background symbol. . With such a configuration, even when the symbol control microcomputer 100a cannot receive the first display result command or the second display result command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the background symbol is displayed in the game. Can prevent the player from being disadvantaged more than necessary. Furthermore, since the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines at least a part of the contents of the game effect using each effect means based on the command received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game control microcomputer 560 The control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, as an example of controlling each effect means using separate control boards, the effect received by the symbol control microcomputer 100a mounted on the symbol control board 80a from the game control microcomputer 560. The case where the control command is transferred to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b has been described. It is not limited to those shown in. For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may first receive an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 and transfer it to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing another circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a. In the example shown in FIG. 75, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the contents of effects to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (for example, the variation pattern command). For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 to determine whether to perform a notice effect. Further, for example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the type of the notice effect using the variable display device 9.

  In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits an effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command) from the main board 31 to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits the generated effect content designation command to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104.

  Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b adds the determined contents (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect) to the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command). Also good. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may transmit an effect control command to which the effect content is added to the symbol control board 80a via the input / output port 104. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the first 4 bits in the EXT data of each variation pattern command (8000 (H) to 8019 (H)) are all “0”. When adding the effect content to the variation pattern command, the symbol control microcomputer 100a adds, for example, a value capable of specifying the determined effect content to the first 4-bit portion of the EXT data, and applies it to the symbol control board 80a. You may send it.

  The operation of the sound / lamp control means (sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) shown in FIG. 76 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b (specifically, the sound / lamp control CPU 101b) mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b starts main processing. In the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like. This is performed (step S881). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S882). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b clears the flag (step S883) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  A timer interrupt takes every 33 ms, for example. That is, the sound / lamp control process is activated every 33 ms, for example. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific sound / lamp control process is executed in the main process, but the sound / lamp control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. Also good.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S884).

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs an effect content determination process (step S885). In the effect content determination process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) (whether or not to perform the notice effect). Kaya, the type of notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs sound output processing (step S886). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data (for example, sound number data corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command) to the speech synthesis IC 703. Then, the voice synthesis IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp display processing (step S887). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp control based on the lamp control execution data set in the process data.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes a process of updating the random number counter (step S888). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs a process of sending the effect control command received from the main board 31 and the effect content designation command generated in the effect content determination process in step S885 to the symbol control board 80a ( Command control processing: Step S889). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S882.

  In the command control processing in step S889, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b is capable of specifying the contents of the first variation pattern command based on the reception of the first variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Control is performed to transmit the one sound / lamp side variation pattern command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the second variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and based on the second variation pattern command, the second variation / lamp-side variation can be specified. Control is performed to transmit the pattern command to the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the first display result command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the first sound / lamp side display that can specify the content of the first display result command. Control is performed to transmit the result command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the second display result command from the game control microcomputer 560 and, based on the second display result command, can specify the content of the second display result command. Control is performed to transmit the result command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command to the symbol control microcomputer 100a only when the first variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. . Only when the second variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the second sound / lamp-side variation pattern command is transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Also, only when the first display result command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the first sound / lamp side display result command is transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Only when the second display result command is received from the game control microcomputer 560, the second sound / lamp-side display result command is transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In this embodiment, the symbol control microcomputer 100a includes the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command received from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, the first Based on the sound / lamp-side display result command and the second sound / lamp-side display result command, display using each decorative design and background design is performed in accordance with the same processing as the production control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment. Take control. In this case, the first variation pattern command in the first embodiment is replaced with the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command, the second variation pattern command is replaced with the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command, One display result command may be read as the first sound / lamp side display result command, and the second display result command may be read as the second sound / lamp side display result command.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Hereinafter, the effect control command sent from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a is also referred to as a sound / lamp side effect control command. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may transmit the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 as it is to the symbol control microcomputer 100a as the sound / lamp-side effect control command. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates the sound / lamp side effect control command shown in FIG. 77 based on the reception of the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the symbol control microcomputer. You may transmit to 100a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, commands 7000 (H) to 7009 (H) are variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a of the variable display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. This is a sound / lamp side effect control command (first sound / lamp side variation pattern command) for designating a pattern variation pattern. The sound / lamp side effect control command for designating the first variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives any of the commands 7000 (H) to 7009 (H), the first decorative symbol display unit 9a of the variable display device 9 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol. To control.

  In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the first variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and can identify the contents of the first variation pattern command. / The lamp side variation pattern command is transmitted to the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. Specifically, the first sound / lamp-side variation pattern command 7000 (H) to be designated as the deviation is based on the reception of any one of the first variation pattern commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H) that are designated as the deviation. 7003 (H) is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of any one of the first variation pattern commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H) for both the probability variation big hit / normal big hit, the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command also used for the probability variation big hit / normal big hit. 7004 (H) to 7006 (H) are transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the first variation pattern command 8007 (H) designated suddenly with probability variation big hit, the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7007 (H) designated with sudden probability variation big hit is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the first variation pattern command 8008 (H) designated for the small hit, the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7008 (H) designated for the small hit is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command 8009 (H) for designating the shortening variation, the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7009 (H) for designating the shortening variation is transmitted.

  Commands 7010 (H) to 7019 (H) designate a variation pattern of the second decorative symbol variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display unit 9b of the variable display device 9 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. This is a sound / lamp side effect control command (second sound / lamp side variation pattern command). The sound / lamp side effect control command for designating the second variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 7010 (H) to 7019 (H), the second decoration symbol display unit 9b of the variable display device 9 starts variable display of the second decoration symbol. To control.

  In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the second variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, and then can specify the content of the second variation pattern command. / The lamp side variation pattern command is transmitted to the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. Specifically, based on the reception of any one of the second variation pattern commands 8010 (H) to 8013 (H) with the designation of deviation, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern commands 7010 (H) to 7010 (H) with designation of the deviation. 7013 (H) is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of any one of the second variation pattern commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H) for both the probability variation big hit / normal big hit, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command also used for the probability variation big hit / normal big hit. 7014 (H) to 7016 (H) are transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the second variation pattern command 8017 (H) for sudden probability variation big hit designation, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7017 (H) for sudden probability variation big hit designation is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the second variation pattern command 8018 (H) designated for the small hit, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7018 (H) designated for the small hit is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the second variation pattern command 8019 (H) for designating the shortening variation, the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command 7019 (H) for designating the shortening variation is transmitted.

  The command 7C00 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (first sound / lamp side deviation designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the first decorative design designated by the first variation pattern command is to be removed. ). Command 7C01 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (first sound / lamp side normal big hit) that designates that the display result of variable display of the first decorative design designated by the first variation pattern command is a normal big hit. Specified command). The command 7C02 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (first sound / lamp side certain variation big hit) that designates that the display result of variable display of the first decorative design designated by the first variation pattern command is a big variation big hit. Specified command).

  The command 7C03 (H) specifies that the probability variation jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 as a normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is a sound / ramp-side effect control command (first sound / probability big hit designation command with re-lottery during the ramp-side round) that specifies execution of a re-lottery effect during a game round. Command 7C04 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display results of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 as a normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is a sound / ramp side effect control command (specific sound big hit designation command with re-lottery after the end of the first sound / lamp side big hit) that specifies execution of the re-lottery effect after the game ends. Command 7C05 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance, sets the display result of variable display of the first decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15-round jackpot This is a sound / ramp-side effect control command (first sound / probability variable jackpot designation command with ramp-side re-lottery) that designates execution of a re-lottery effect during the game round and after the end of the big hit game.

  In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the first display result command from the game control microcomputer 560, and can specify the contents of the first display result command. / The lamp side display result command is transmitted to the design controlling microcomputer 100a. More specifically, the first sound / lamp side display result command 7C00 (H) with the detachment designation is transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command 8C00 (H) with the detachment designation. Further, based on the reception of the first display result command 8C01 (H) with normal jackpot designation, the first sound / lamp side display result command 7C01 (H) with normal jackpot designation is transmitted. The first sound / lamp side display result commands 7C02 (H) to 7C05 for which the probability variation big hit is designated based on the reception of any one of the first display result commands 8C02 (H) to 8C05 (H) for which the probability variation big hit is designated. (H) is transmitted. Further, the first sound / lamp side display result command 7C06 (H) of sudden probability variation big hit designation is transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command 8C06 (H) of sudden probability variation big hit designation. Further, based on the reception of the first display result command 8C07 (H) designated for small hits, the first sound / lamp side display result command 7C07 (H) designated for small hits is transmitted.

  The command 7C10 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (second sound / lamp side deviation designation command) which designates that the display result of variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is to be removed. ). Command 7C11 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (second sound / lamp side normal big hit) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative design designated by the second variation pattern command is a normal big hit. Specified command). Command 7C12 (H) is a sound / lamp side effect control command (second sound / lamp side probability variation big hit) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol designated by the second variation pattern command is to be a probability big hit. Specified command).

  Command 7C13 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance and sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to be the normal jackpot symbol, 15 round jackpot This is a sound / ramp-side effect control command (second sound / probability big hit designation command with re-lottery during the ramp-side round) that specifies execution of a re-lottery effect during a game round. Command 7C14 (H) specifies that the probability change jackpot has been determined in advance, sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 to the normal jackpot symbol, 15-round jackpot This is a sound / ramp side effect control command (second sound / probability big hit designation command with re-lottery after the end of the ramp side jackpot) that designates execution of the redraw lottery effect after the game ends. Command 7C15 (H) specifies that the probability variation jackpot has been determined in advance, and sets the display result of the variable display of the second decorative symbol and the background symbol on the variable display device 9 as the normal jackpot symbol, and 15 rounds jackpot This is a sound / ramp-side effect control command (second sound / probability variable jackpot designation command with lamp-side re-lottery) that designates execution of a re-lottery effect during the game round and after the end of the big hit game.

  In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the second display result command from the game control microcomputer 560, and can specify the content of the second display result command. / The lamp side display result command is transmitted to the design controlling microcomputer 100a. Specifically, the second sound / lamp-side display result command 7C10 (H) with the detachment designation is transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command 8C10 (H) with the detachment designation. Further, based on the reception of the second display result command 8C11 (H) designated for the normal big hit, the second sound / lamp side display result command 7C11 (H) designated for the normal big hit is transmitted. The second sound / lamp side display result commands 7C12 (H) to 7C15 for which the probability variation big hit is designated based on the reception of any one of the second display result commands 8C12 (H) to 8C15 (H) for which the probability variation big hit is designated. (H) is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the second display result command 8C16 (H) specified by sudden probability change big hit, the second sound / lamp side display result command 7C16 (H) specified by sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. Further, based on the reception of the second display result command 8C17 (H) designated for small hits, the second sound / lamp side display result command 7C17 (H) designated for small hits is transmitted.

  Sound / lamp side effect control commands other than the sound / lamp side effect control commands shown in FIG. 77 are also transmitted from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. For example, a sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to each of the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, a more detailed sound / lamp side effect control command related to the big hit game, and a sound / lamp side effect indicating the game state A control command (for example, a sound / lamp-side effect control command indicating an initialization command) is also transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs the effect content (whether or not the notice effect is executed and the type of the notice effect in accordance with the processing similar to steps S2851A to S2857A shown in FIG. 74 in the effect content determination process in step S885. ) And an effect content command including the determined effect content is generated. Then, the effect content command is transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a in the command control process of step S889.

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a executes main processing according to the same processing as that in steps S781 to S790 shown in FIG. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a performs display control of the variable display device 9 according to the same process as the first ornament symbol process shown in FIG. 39 in the first ornament symbol process corresponding to step S787. Further, in the second decorative symbol process processing corresponding to step S788, display control of the variable display device 9 is performed according to the same processing as the first decorative symbol process processing shown in FIG. In the background symbol process corresponding to step S789, display control of the variable display device 9 is performed in accordance with the same process as the background symbol process shown in FIG. In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes a notice effect in the background symbol process based on the effect content command received from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Specifically, when execution of the notice effect is specified in the effect content command, process data including the notice effect in the background symbol variation start waiting process according to the type of the notice effect specified in the effect content command. Is selected (see step S1824). Then, according to the contents of the selected process data, a notice effect is executed during the change of the background symbol (see steps S962, S986, and S645). For example, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a performs an effect of notifying the jackpot by causing a predetermined character to appear on the display screen of the variable display device 9.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the case where the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes the notice effect according to the effect contents determined by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b has been described, but the symbol control microcomputer 100a. May determine the contents of the production. In this case, the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes the effect content determination process in the main process, and is based on the sound / lamp side variation pattern command and the sound / lamp side display result command received from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Then, the contents of the effect (whether or not the notice effect is performed and the type of the notice effect) may be determined. The notice effect may be executed during the change of the background symbol according to the determined effect content.

  In the gaming machines shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a according to the processing of steps S1509, S1510, and S1519 in the first special symbol normal processing. It is determined whether or not the display result of the display is a jackpot symbol and whether or not the probability change jackpot is to be made. Further, according to the processing of steps S203, S204, S205, and S206 in the first variation pattern setting process, the variable from the start of variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a until the display result is derived and displayed. Determine the display time. Further, according to the same processing as steps S1509, S1510, and S1519 in the second special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b is to be a big hit symbol, and the probability variation big hit. It is determined whether or not. Also, in the second variation pattern setting process, following the process similar to steps S203, S204, S205, and S206, from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b until the display result is derived and displayed. Determine the variable display time.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the steps S332a to S343a according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. 34 (A) in the effect symbol command control process, so that the determined variable display time can be specified. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Also, in the effect symbol command control process, the sound / lamp control is performed on the second variation pattern command that can specify the determined variable display time by executing steps S332b to S343b according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. To the microcomputer 100b. In addition, by executing steps S332a to S343a according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. 34A, a first display result command that can specify a determination result as to whether or not to make a big hit symbol and whether to make a probable big hit or not. This is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In addition, by executing steps S332b to S343b according to the command transmission table shown in FIG. 34B, a second display result command that can specify the determination result as to whether to make a big hit symbol or whether to make a probable big hit. This is transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b.

  The sound / lamp control microcomputer (electrical component control means) 100b receives the first variation pattern command and, based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command ( The commands 7000 (H) to 7009 (H) shown in FIG. 77 are transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer (display control means) 100a (see step S889). Further, based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, a second sound / lamp side variation pattern command (commands 7010 (H) to 7019 (H) shown in FIG. 77) that can specify the content of the second variation pattern command. ) Is transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer (display control means) 100a (see step S889). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the first display result command and, based on the reception of the first display result command, the first sound / lamp side display result command that can specify the contents of the first display result command. It transmits to the computer 100a (refer step S889). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the second display result command and, based on the reception of the second display result command, the second sound / lamp side display result command that can specify the contents of the second display result command. It transmits to the computer 100a (refer step S889).

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the display result of variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, whether or not to make a probable big hit, and the determination result of the variable display time of the first special symbol. First, variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is executed, and display on the first special symbol display 8a based on the passage of the variable display time of the determined first special symbol. Derived results are displayed. Also, the second special symbol display based on whether or not the variable special display display result of the second special symbol is a big hit symbol, whether or not the probability variable big hit is determined, and the variable special display time of the second special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol of the device 8b is executed, and the display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b based on the passage of the variable display time of the determined second special symbol.

  Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a applies the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command and the first sound / lamp side display result command according to the processing of steps S1825 to S1831, S941 to S987, S611 to S645, and S1870 to S1876. Based on the fact that the variable display time specified by the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command has elapsed when the variable display of the background symbol of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed, the display result on the background symbol display unit 9c Is derived and displayed. Further, according to the processing of steps S1825 to S1831, S941 to S987, S611 to S645, and S1870 to S1876, the background symbol display unit 9c is based on the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command and the second sound / lamp side display result command. When the variable display of the background symbol is executed, the display result is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c based on the passage of the variable display time specified by the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command.

  Further, when the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first variation pattern command, the game control microcomputer 560 wins the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 8a as the first variation pattern command. A first variation pattern command (first variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit: command commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H), first specific display variable display command) that can specify only that it has been determined Send. Further, as the first variation pattern command, the game control microcomputer 560 can specify that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 9a is determined not to be a big hit. A variation pattern command (commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H), first non-specific display variable display command) is transmitted.

  In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the second variation pattern command, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a big hit as the second variation pattern command. Second variation pattern command (second variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit: command commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H), second specific display variable display command) that can be specified only by To do. Further, as the second variation pattern command, the game control microcomputer 560 can specify that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 8b is determined not to be a big hit. A variation pattern command (commands 8010 (H) to 8013 (H), second non-specific display variable display command) is transmitted.

  Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a derives and displays the probability variation symbol determined by the same processing as step S934 using the probability variation big hit symbol determination table selected by the processing similar to step S932 by the processing similar to step S1873. To do. In other words, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (command 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)). Command 7004 (H) to 7006 (H)), and a first display result command that can be determined to be a jackpot symbol for the variable special display display result of the first special symbol and that can be specified to be a probability variable jackpot. When the first sound / lamp side display result command (command 7C02 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception is received, the background symbol is displayed based on the passage of the variable display time. As a jackpot symbol, a probability variation symbol indicating that the game will shift to a probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. That. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command transmitted based on the reception of the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H)). The second sound transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command that can be determined that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol and can be determined to be the probability variable jackpot / When the lamp side display result command (command 7C12 (H) shown in FIG. 77) is received, after the jackpot gaming state is ended as a jackpot symbol of the background symbol based on the passage of the variable display time. A probability variation symbol indicating transition to the probability variation state is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c.

  Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a derives the non-probable variation symbol determined by the same processing as step S934 using the normal big hit symbol determination table selected by the same processing as step S933 by the same processing as step S1873. indicate. In other words, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (command 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)). Command 7004 (H) to 7006 (H)), and a first display result command that can be determined to be a big hit symbol as a variable bonus display result of the first special symbol and can be specified as a normal big hit. When the first sound / lamp side display result command (command 7C01 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception is received, the background symbol is displayed based on the passage of the variable display time. As the jackpot symbol, a non-probable variation symbol indicating that the game will shift to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is derived in the background symbol display unit 9c. To. Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command (based on receiving the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H))). For example, the commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H)) and the second display result that can specify that the display result of variable display of the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit symbol and that it is determined to be a normal big hit. When the second sound / lamp side display result command (command 7C11 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the command is received, the background is determined based on the passage of the variable display time. As the symbol jackpot symbol, a non-probable variation symbol indicating that the game will shift to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state is terminated is introduced to the background symbol display unit 9c. To display.

  In addition, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a derives and displays the off symbol determined by the same processing as in step S1805 by the same processing as in step S1876. In other words, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first non-specific display variable display command (commands 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)) and transmits the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command. When (commands 7000 (H) to 7003 (H)) are received, based on the fact that the variable display time has elapsed, the background symbols are displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c as a stop symbol as a background symbol stop symbol. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the second non-specific display variable display command (commands 8010 (H) to 8013 (H)) and transmits the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command. When (commands 7010 (H) to 7013 (H)) are received, the symbols that are out of the background symbols are displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c based on the fact that the variable display time has elapsed.

  Further, when the symbol control microcomputer 100a determines N in the same process as in step S911 and determines Y in the same process as in step S913, it determines the normal big hit symbol selected in the same process as in step S933. The uncertain variable symbol determined by the process similar to step S934 using the table is derived and displayed by the process similar to step S1873. In other words, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (command 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)). Commands 7004 (H) to 7006 (H)) are received, but the first sound / lamp side display result command cannot be received, and when the variable display time has elapsed, an uncertain variable symbol is derived to the background symbol display unit 9c. indicate. Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command (based on receiving the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H))). Commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H)) are received, but the second sound / lamp side display result command cannot be received, and when the variable display time elapses, an uncertain variable symbol is derived to the background symbol display unit 9c. indicate.

  Further, when the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a determines N in the same process as in step S915, S916, or S917, the symbol control microcomputer 100a uses the normal time big hit symbol determining table selected in the same process as in step S933. The non-probable variation determined by the same process is derived and displayed by the same process as in step S1873. In other words, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (the first sound / lamp side variation pattern command (command 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command (command 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) When commands 7004 (H) to 7006 (H)) are received, but the first sound / lamp side display result command cannot be received correctly due to garbled data or the like, the background pattern is displayed when the variable display time has elapsed. A non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed on the display unit 9c. Further, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a receives the second sound / lamp side variation pattern command (based on receiving the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H))). If commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H)) are received, but the second sound / lamp side display result command cannot be correctly received due to garbled data or the like, the background pattern is displayed when the variable display time has elapsed. A non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed on the display unit 9c.

  That is, the display control means (symbol control microcomputer 100a) receives the first specific display variable display command (commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H)) and receives the first electric component variable transmitted. After receiving the display command (commands 7004 (H) to 7006 (H)), the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is specified display result (big hit symbol) by the first predetermining means. The first display result command (commands 8C02 (H) to 8C05 (H)) that can be specified to be determined and to be determined to satisfy a predetermined transition condition (probability big hit) is determined. The first electrical component display result command (commands 7C02 (H) to 7C05 (H)) transmitted based on the first or first pre-determining means It is possible to specify that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the variable display part is determined to be the specific display result (big hit symbol) and that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (usually a big hit) A predetermined command (for example, first data garbled) other than the first electrical component display result command (command 7C01 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command (command 8C01 (H)). Variation of first sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to sound / lamp side display result command, first effect memory information designation command to be received next to first sound / lamp side display result command, variation of second decorative design Sound / lamp side effect control command for designating display, which is suddenly confirmed after the first sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to the first specific display variable display command. When the first sound / lamp-side display result command specified by jackpot is not transmitted, the first variable display time may be received when the first sound / lamp-side display result command specified by sudden change jackpot is received). Based on the elapse of time, a non-special display result (non-probable variation symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  Further, the display control means (symbol controlling microcomputer 100a) receives the second specific display variable display command (commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H)) and receives the second electric component variable transmitted. After receiving the display commands (commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H)), the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is specified display result (big hit symbol) by the second predetermining means. The second display result command (commands 8C12 (H) to 8C15 (H)) that can be determined to be determined and to establish a predetermined transition condition (to be a probable big hit) is determined. The second electrical component display result command (commands 7C12 (H) to 7C15 (H)) transmitted based on the second or second pre-determining means It is possible to specify that it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the variable display unit is the specific display result (big hit symbol) and that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (usually the big hit) Predetermined commands other than the second electrical component display result command (command 7C11 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command (command 8C11 (H)) (for example, the second sound garbled into data) / Ramp side display result command, second sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to the second effect memory information designation command to be received next to the second sound / lamp side display result command, and variable display of the first decorative symbol A sound / lamp side effect control command for designating a sudden change in probability after the second sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to the second specific display variable display command. If the second sound / lamp side display result command specified is not transmitted, the second variable display time may be received when the second sound / lamp side display result command specified by sudden probability change is received). Based on the elapse of time, a non-special display result (non-probable variation symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  Further, the display control means (symbol control microcomputer 100a) suddenly receives the first variable display command (command 8007 (H)) designated by the sudden probability change big hit (command 8007 (H)). When the command 7007 (H) is received, the display for the sudden probability variable big hit that is different from the special display result (probable variation symbol) as the specific display result (big hit symbol) based on the elapse of the first variable display time The result (suddenly probable big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  Further, the display control means (the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a) suddenly receives the second variable display command (command 8017 (H)) designated by the probability variation big hit (second electric component variable display command ( When the command 7017 (H)) is received, the display for the sudden probability variable big hit that is different from the special display result (probability variable symbol) as the specific display result (big hit symbol) based on the fact that the second variable display time has elapsed. The result (suddenly probable big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  Further, the display control means (symbol control microcomputer 100a) suddenly receives the first variable display command (command 8007 (H)) designated by the sudden probability change big hit (command 8007 (H)). After receiving the command 7007 (H)), the first display result command (command 8C06 (H)) that can specify that it has been determined by the first pre-determining means that the game state is suddenly changed to the probable big hit game state. A predetermined command other than the first electrical component display result command (command 7C06 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the first sound / lamp side display result command, for example, First sound / lamp side effect control corresponding to the first effect storage information designation command to be received next to the lamp side display result command Command, a sound / lamp side effect control command for designating a variable display of the second decorative symbol), a special display result as a specific display result (a jackpot symbol) based on the passage of the first variable display time. A display result (sudden probability variation big hit symbol) for sudden probability variation big hit different from (probable variation symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  Further, the display control means (the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a) suddenly receives the second variable display command (command 8017 (H)) designated by the probability variation big hit (second electric component variable display command ( After receiving the command 7017 (H)), the second display result command (command 8C16 (H)) that can specify that it has been determined that the second pre-determining means has suddenly shifted to the probable big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. A predetermined command other than the second electrical component display result command (command 7C16 (H)) transmitted based on the reception of the second sound / lamp side display result command, for example, Second sound / lamp side effect control corresponding to the second effect memory information designation command to be received next to the lamp side display result command Command, a sound / lamp side effect control command for designating the variable display of the first decorative symbol), the special display result as the specific display result (big hit symbol) based on the fact that the second variable display time has elapsed. A display result (sudden probability variation big hit symbol) for sudden probability variation big hit different from (probable variation symbol) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit (background symbol display unit 9c).

  When the symbol control microcomputer 100a cannot receive the sound / lamp side display result command (including when it cannot be received correctly due to data corruption), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b The sound / lamp-side display result command itself was not sent because the display result command could not be received (or because it was not received correctly due to garbled data or the like), and the symbol control microcomputer was sent. 100a may fail to receive the sound / lamp side display result command (including a case where the sound / lamp side display result command has not been received correctly due to garbled data or the like). Even receive the sound / lamp side display result command When not come in, the non-probability variation pattern is derived displayed on the variable display device 9.

  In this embodiment, as an example of controlling each presentation means using separate control boards, a case has been described in which a gaming machine includes a symbol control board 80a and a sound / lamp control board 80b. A plurality of control boards may be provided. For example, the gaming machine may include a symbol / sound control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the speaker 27, and a lamp control board that controls the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. In this case, the display control means is realized by a symbol / sound control microcomputer mounted on a symbol / sound control board for controlling the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a lamp control microcomputer mounted on a lamp control board that controls each lamp. In addition, the design / sound control microcomputer mounted on the design / sound control board determines the contents of the effect, and each effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is sent to the lamp control microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board. May be transmitted, and an effect content designation command including the determined effect content may be transmitted. Further, for example, the gaming machine may include a symbol / lamp control board that controls the variable display device 9 and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c and a sound control board that controls the speaker 27. In this case, the display control means is realized by a symbol / lamp control microcomputer mounted on a symbol / lamp control board for controlling the variable display device 9. The electric component control means is realized by a sound control microcomputer mounted on a sound control board for controlling the speaker. In addition, the design / lamp control microcomputer mounted on the design / lamp control board determines the contents of the presentation, and the effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560 are sent to the sound control microcomputer mounted on the sound control board. May be transmitted, and an effect content designation command including the determined effect content may be transmitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, separate effect control commands (change pattern command, display result command, effect) are used when the first special symbol variation is started and when the second special symbol variation is started. The memory control command 560 is transmitted, but when the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to be changed, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is transmitted. An effect control command (design variation specifying command) indicating which change is to be started may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs a common variation pattern command and a common display result command when starting the variation of the first special symbol and when the variation of the second special symbol is started. You may make it transmit to the computer 100. FIG. With this configuration, the variation pattern command and the display result command can be shared when the first special symbol variation starts and when the second special symbol variation starts, so that the game control microcomputer 560 can be used. The number of effect control commands to be transmitted can be reduced.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transmission timing of each effect control command when the symbol variation designation command, the common variation pattern command, and the common display result command are used. At the start of variation, the game control microcomputer 560 starts the background designation command (effect control command for designating the type of background displayed on the variable display device 9), symbol variation designation command, variation pattern command, effect symbol designation command (display result). Command) and effect storage information command. Specifically, when a background designation command is transmitted in a game control process based on a timer interrupt, a symbol variation designation command and a variation pattern command are transmitted in a game control process based on the next timer interrupt. In addition, an effect designating command is transmitted in the game control process based on the next timer interruption. Further, the effect storage information command is transmitted in the game control process based on the next timer interruption. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command (decorative symbol stop designation command) is transmitted. By doing so, the variation pattern command and the display result command can be shared when the first special symbol variation is started and when the second special symbol variation is started. The number of effect control commands to be transmitted can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes a predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  Moreover, in each embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown in the following (1) to (8) is also shown.

(1) The first start condition for variable display is satisfied after the first execution condition for variable display is satisfied (for example, the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13) (for example, the end of the previous variable display is completed) The first variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) for starting the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the The second start condition of variable display is satisfied (for example, the end of the previous variable display) after the second execution condition of display is satisfied (for example, the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 14) A second variable display unit (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that starts variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result is provided. The specific display result (example) on either the variable display unit or the second variable display unit For example, when a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the game is shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, determined to be a promising big hit in step S1519). The special game state (for example, the probability change) is likely to cause the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information to be the specific display result as compared with the normal state after the specific game state ends. Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display section, and the second A predetermined effect display unit (for example, a variable display unit) that performs variable display of the effect information (for example, background symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the variable display unit (for example, Display control means (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a) for controlling the display state of the scene symbol display unit 9c and each variable display device when two variable display devices are provided, and among the electrical components used for the game effect Electrical component control means (for example, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for controlling predetermined electrical components other than the predetermined effect display section, and the game control means for the first identification information in the first variable display section. First predetermining means (for example, steps S1509, S1510, and S1519 in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not the display result of variable display is a specific display result and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The first identification information on the first variable display unit based on the determination result of the first prior determination means First variable display time determining means for determining a first variable display time from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (for example, steps S203, S204, S205, and S206 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed) A second pre-determining means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is a specific display result, and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. For example, in the second special symbol normal processing in the game control microcomputer 560, the same processing as in steps S1509, S1510, and S1519) and the determination result of the second predetermining means, the second variable display section Determining the second variable display time from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the time when the display result is derived and displayed. Determined by variable display time determining means (for example, a part that executes the same processing as steps S203, S204, S205, and S206 in the second variation pattern setting process in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first variable display time determining means. The first variable display command transmitting means for transmitting the first variable display command that can specify the first variable display time to the electric component control means (for example, the first variable display command shown in FIG. 34A in the game control microcomputer 560). A portion that executes steps S332a to S343a according to the command transmission table) and a second variable display command that can specify the second variable display time determined by the second variable display time determination means is transmitted to the electrical component control means. Variable display command transmission means (for example, a microcomputer for game control) And a first display result command capable of specifying the determination result by the first pre-determining means is transmitted to the electrical component control means, in accordance with the second command transmission table shown in FIG. First display result command transmission means (for example, a part that executes steps S332a to S343a according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG. 34A in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination result by the second pre-decision means The second display result command transmission means for transmitting the second display result command that can identify the electronic component control means (for example, steps S332b to S332b according to the second command transmission table shown in FIG. 34B in the game control microcomputer 560). A portion for executing S343b), and electricity Based on the reception of the first variable display command, the component control means can specify a first electric component variable display command (for example, commands 7000 (H) to 7009 shown in FIG. 77) that can specify the contents of the first variable display command. (H)) is transmitted to the display control means, and the first electric component variable display command transmission means (for example, the part that executes step S889 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the second variable display command are received. The second electric component variable display command (for example, commands 7010 (H) to 7019 (H) shown in FIG. 77) that can specify the content of the second variable display command is transmitted to the display control means based on the second electric display command. The component variable display command transmission means (for example, step S889 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) And the first electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C00 (H) to FIG. 77 shown in FIG. 77) that can specify the content of the first display result command based on the reception of the first display result command. 7C07 (H)) to the display control means, the first electrical component display result command transmission means (for example, the part that executes step S889 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the second display result command are received. Based on this, the second electrical component display result command (for example, commands 7C10 (H) to 7C17 (H) shown in FIG. 77) that can specify the content of the second display result command is transmitted to the display control means. Electrical component display result command transmission means (for example, step S889 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) The game control means executes variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display section based on the determination results of the first prior determination means and the first variable display time determination means. The first variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the display result on the first variable display section based on the elapse of the first variable display time determined by the first variable display time determining means (for example, for game control) The second variable display based on the determination results of the second pre-determining means and the second variable display time determining means) and the steps S209, S210, S351 to S356, S161, and S1301 to S1305 in the microcomputer 560 A second variable display time determined by the second variable display time determination means has passed, and the second identification information of the second portion is displayed. Second variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display portion (for example, a portion for executing the same processing as steps S209, S210, S351 to S356, S161, S1301 to S1305 in the game control microcomputer 560) And the display control means executes the first variable display time when variable display of the effect information of the predetermined effect display unit is performed based on the first electric component variable display command and the first electric component display result command. Based on the elapsed time, the display result is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit, and variable display of the effect information on the predetermined effect display unit is executed based on the second electric component variable display command and the second electric component display result command. When the second variable display time has elapsed, the display result is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit. Display execution means (for example, a part for executing the same processing as in steps S1825 to S1831, S941 to S987, S611 to S645, and S1870 to S1876 in the design control microcomputer 100a), the first variable display command transmission means includes: As a first variable display command, a first specific display variable that can specify that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is set as the specific display result by the first pre-determining means. The display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit by the display command (for example, commands 8004 (H) to 8006 (H) shown in FIG. 11) or the first predetermining means is used as the specific display result. The first non-specific display variable display command (for example, a command shown in FIG. 8000 (H) to 8003 (H)) (for example, the part for executing steps S332a to S343a according to the first command transmission table shown in FIG. 34A in the game control microcomputer 560) The two variable display command transmission means specifies that the second variable display command is determined by the second prior determination means to change the display result of the variable identification of the second identification information of the second variable display section to the specific display result. Variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit by the second variable display command for specific display (for example, commands 8014 (H) to 8016 (H) shown in FIG. 11) or the second predetermining means. The second non-specific display variable display command (for example, the command shown in FIG. 11) that can specify that the display result is determined not to be the specific display result. (For example, a part for executing steps S332b to S343b in accordance with the second command transmission table shown in FIG. 34B in the game control microcomputer 560). The effect display execution means includes a first electric component variable display command (for example, commands 7004 (H) to 7006 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command. The first predetermining means can determine that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result, and can determine that the predetermined transition condition has been established. The first electrical component display result command (for example, the command shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command. 7C02 (H)), the special display after the specific gaming state ends as the display result of the variable display of the production information corresponding to the specific display result based on the fact that the first variable display time has elapsed. A second electrical component transmitted based on receiving a second specific display variable display command by deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, a probable variation symbol) indicating transition to the gaming state on a predetermined effect display unit The variable display command (for example, commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H) shown in FIG. 77) and the second display determination result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit by the second predetermining unit And the second electrical component display connection transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command that can be determined to satisfy the predetermined transition condition. When the command (for example, command 7C12 (H) shown in FIG. 77) is received, the display result of the variable display of the effect information corresponding to the specific display result is based on the fact that the second variable display time has elapsed. Special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying a special display result indicating that the transition to the special game state is completed after the specific game state is finished (for example, similar to step S932 in the symbol control microcomputer 100a) A portion for deriving and displaying the probability variation symbol determined in the same processing as step S934 using the probability variation jackpot symbol determination table selected in step S934, similar to step S1812 in the symbol control microcomputer 100a. Step by using the probability change big hit symbol determination table selected in the process of A portion that derives and displays the probability variation symbol determined in the same process as in S1813 in the process similar to that in Step S1873) and the first electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command. (For example, commands 7004 (H) to 700 shown in FIG. 77.
6 (H)) and the first pre-determining means determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result and determines that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied. When the first electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C01 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command that can specify that the first display result command is received, Based on the elapse of the variable display time, as a display result of the variable display of the effect information corresponding to the specific display result, a non-special display result (for example, indicating that the transition to the special game state is not performed after the specific game state ends) , A non-probable variable) is derived and displayed on a predetermined effect display unit, and a second electrical component variable display command (for example, transmitted based on the reception of the second specific display variable display command) 77, the commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H)) shown in FIG. 77 and the second predetermining means determine that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is the specific display result. In addition, the second electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C11 (H shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command that can specify that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied is received. )) Is received and the special game state is entered after the specific game state is ended as the display result of the variable display of the production information corresponding to the specific display result based on the fact that the second variable display time has elapsed. Non-special display result derivation display means for deriving and displaying a non-special display result indicating that the transition is not performed on a predetermined effect display unit (for example, to the design control microcomputer 100a) A part for deriving and displaying a non-probability variable symbol determined in the same processing as in step S 1873 using the normal jackpot symbol determination table selected in the same processing as in step S 933 in the same processing as in step S 1873. The portion for deriving and displaying in step S1873 the non-probable variable symbol determined in the same process as in step S1813 using the normal jackpot symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S1809 in 100a) and the first specific display variable After receiving the first electric component variable display command (for example, commands 7004 (H) to 7006 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the display command, When the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the variable display part is the specific display result The first electrical component display result command (for example, 7C02 shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command that can be determined to satisfy the predetermined transition condition. (H) to 7C05 (H)), or the first predetermining means determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result and establishes a predetermined transition condition Predetermined commands other than the first electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C01 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command that can specify that it is determined not to be performed (For example, the first sound / lamp side display result command garbled or the first effect storage information designation to be received next to the first sound / lamp side display result command Sound corresponding to command / lamp side effect control commands, sound / the lamp side effect control command designating the variable display of the second decorative design. If the first sound / lamp-side display result command for sudden probability change big hit is not transmitted after the first sound / lamp-side effect control command corresponding to the first specific display variable display command, sudden probability change is performed. The first sound / lamp side display result command specified by jackpot) is received, the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the predetermined effect display unit based on the elapse of the first variable display time, and the second After receiving the second electric component variable display command (for example, commands 7014 (H) to 7016 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the variable display command for specific display, the second predetermination is performed. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is to be the specific display result by the means and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. The second electric component display result command (for example, 7C12 (H) to 7C15 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception of the second display result command that can specify the second display result command, or the second pre-determining means The second display result command that can determine that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is the specific display result and that it is determined not to satisfy the predetermined transition condition Predetermined commands other than the second electrical component display result command (for example, command 7C11 (H) shown in FIG. 77) transmitted based on the reception, such as the second sound / lamp side display result command garbled, The sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to the second effect memory information designation command to be received next to the second sound / lamp side display result command, the first decoration diagram The sound / lamp side effect control command for designating the variable display of the second sound / lamp side display designated for sudden probability change big hit after the second sound / lamp side effect control command corresponding to the second specific display variable display command. If the result command is not transmitted, the second sound / lamp-side display result command specified by sudden probability change jackpot may be received), based on the fact that the second variable display time has passed. Non-special display result derivation display means at the time of abnormal reception for deriving and displaying the non-special display result on the display unit (for example, when it is determined as N in the same process as step S915, S916 or S917 in the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a, A normal jackpot symbol determination table selected in the same process as in step S933 is used to determine the same process as in step S934. The determined non-probable variation symbol may be configured to include a portion that is derived and displayed by the same processing as in step S1873.
According to such a configuration, after receiving the first electric component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the first specific display variable display command, the first variable display unit is configured by the first predetermining means. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific display result, and is transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command that can specify that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result by the first electric component display result command or the first pre-determining means, and a predetermined transition condition is not satisfied A predetermined command other than the first electrical component display result command transmitted based on the reception of the first display result command that can specify that it has been determined. When receiving, the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the predetermined effect display unit, and after receiving the second electrical component variable display command transmitted based on the reception of the second specific display variable display command, The second predetermining means can determine that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display section is the specific display result and can specify that the predetermined transition condition has been determined. It is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the second variable display unit is set as the specific display result by the second electrical component display result command transmitted based on the reception of the display result command or the second pre-determining means. And the second electrical part transmitted on the basis of receiving the second display result command that can specify that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied. When a predetermined command other than the display result command is received, the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the predetermined effect display unit, so whether or not at least the variable display result is the specific display result. Can be recognized, and the display result of the variable display can be recognized by the player, which can prevent the player from being disadvantaged more than necessary. Further, the display control means can determine whether or not the specific display result is based on one command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted by the game control means can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control means can be reduced.

(2) The second variable display executing means is variable display time measuring means for measuring the second variable display time of the second identification information in the second variable display section (for example, the second special symbol in the game control microcomputer 560). During the execution of the variable display of the second identification information on the second variable display unit), the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit. Based on this, the variable display time measurement interrupting means for interrupting the measurement of the second variable display time by the variable display time measuring means (for example, steps S324 to S326 in the second special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560). And a portion that executes the same processing as in FIG.
According to such a configuration, the measurement of the variable table time of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is interrupted based on the specific display result being derived and displayed in the first variable display unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit at the same time.

(3) The second pre-determining means is based on the fact that the first pre-determining means determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result. Specification until the specific display result is derived and displayed by the first variable display execution means after the prior determination means determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display section is the specific display result During the period (for example, the period from when the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first jackpot flag at step S1511 to when the stop symbol is derived and displayed at step S1302), the second identification information of the second variable display unit Forced non-specific display result determination means for determining that the variable display display result is not to be the specific display result (for example, step S1507 in the game control microcomputer 560) In the specific gaming state that has been transferred when the specific display result is derived by the first variable display execution means, including the portion that proceeds to step S1516 without executing steps S1508 to S1511 when determined as Y in Restriction control means for executing predetermined control that does not satisfy the second start condition (for example, step S325 when it is determined that Y is the same as step S324 in the second special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560) It may be configured to include a portion that controls not to execute the same processing as steps S300 to S311 by shifting to the same processing.
According to such a configuration, the specific display result is derived and displayed by the first variable display execution means after determining that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit is the specific display result. Since it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is not set as the specific display result during the specific period up to, the first variable display unit specifies It is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the display result is derived and displayed and the specific display result is derived and displayed in the second variable display unit at the same time.

(4) The predetermined effect display unit includes a third variable display unit (for example, the background symbol display unit 9c) that is easier to visually recognize than the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit. The control means includes first hold memory data (for example, the first hold memory number, for example) that can specify the hold memory number for which the first execution condition for variable display is satisfied but the first start condition for variable display is not yet satisfied. The first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number counter) for storing the count value of the counter and the second execution condition for variable display are satisfied, but the second start condition for variable display is still satisfied. Second holding storage data (for example, a second holding memory number counter) for storing second holding memory data (for example, the count value of the second holding memory number counter) capable of specifying a non-holding memory number, and an effect display The execution means is in the third variable display section. The variable display of the third identification information associated with the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, and the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is supported on the third variable display unit. The display result of the variable display of the third identification information as the attached production information is derived and displayed (for example, the steps of executing steps S1825 to S1831, S941 to S987, S611 to S645, and S1870 to S1877 in the production control microcomputer 100) ), The display control means displays the total pending memory number that is the sum of the pending memory number specified by the first reserved memory data and the reserved memory number specified by the second reserved memory data so as to be able to be specified. Number display means (for example, a part for executing step S853 in the production control microcomputer 100). It may be.
According to such a configuration, the total pending storage which is the sum of the pending storage number specified by the first reserved storage data and the reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage data stored separately in the gaming machine. Since the number is configured to be identifiable, the total number of reserved memories can be recognized by the player as the number of reserved memories corresponding to the third variable display unit.

(5) The game control means may determine the first reserved storage data (for example, the first reserved data) that can specify the number of reserved memories for which the first execution condition for variable display is satisfied but the first start condition for variable display is not yet satisfied. First hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number counter) for storing the first hold storage number counter), and the second start condition for variable display, although the second execution condition for variable display has been satisfied. Second holding storage means (for example, a second holding memory number counter) for storing second holding memory data (for example, a count value of the second holding memory number counter) that can specify the number of holding memories for which is not established The first variable display time determining means and the second variable display time determining means are a total hold that is the sum of the number of hold storages specified by the first hold storage data and the number of hold storages specified by the second hold storage data Based on the number of memories The first variable display time from the start of the variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit to the display of the display result, and the variable display of the second identification information on the second variable display unit are started. Variable display time shortening means for shortening the second variable display time until the display result is derived and displayed (for example, a part for executing steps S203A to S203C in the game control microcomputer 560, in the game control microcomputer 560) In the first variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the variation time is shortened, and the shortened variation time is determined in step S209. 1 special symbol process timer and a portion for transmitting the first variation pattern command). It may be.
According to such a configuration, since the variable display time is shortened based on the total reserved memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, the first variable display It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the shortening variation is performed at the time of variable display of one of the second display unit and the second variable display unit, but the shortening variation is not performed at the time of the other variable display. Further, to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the variable display time even though the total reserved memory number is shown to the player as the reserved memory number corresponding to the third variable display unit. Can do.

(6) The game control means transmits an end notification command (for example, an ending command) for executing an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) for notifying the end of the specific game state when the specific game state is ended. End notification command transmission means (for example, a part for executing steps S448, S450, S452, S454, S455, and S456 in the game control microcomputer 560). 2 An end notification command that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is determined to be satisfied by the prior determination means, or that the predetermined transition condition is determined not to be satisfied by the first prior determination means or the second prior determination means. (For example, the commands A300 (H) and A301 (H) shown in FIG. A303 (H) to A305 (H)) are transmitted (for example, the portion of steps S448, S450, S454, and S455 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the display control means transmits the end notification command. An end notification executing means for executing an end notification effect based on the above (for example, a portion for executing steps S2971 to S2777 (except for steps S2973a to S2973k) in the effect control microcomputer 100) and derivation of a non-special display result upon abnormal reception It is possible to specify that a predetermined transition condition has been established by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means, provided that a non-special display result is derived and displayed on the predetermined effect display section by the display means. Termination based on the fact that a complete termination notification command was sent Instead of the end notification effect by the knowledge execution means, the end time notification effect execution means for executing the end time notification effect for notifying that the predetermined transition condition has been established (for example, steps S2973a to S2973k in the effect control microcomputer 100). A portion to be executed).
According to such a configuration, an end-time notification that notifies that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is transmitted based on the transmission of an end notification command that can be determined to determine that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Since the presentation is configured to be executed, even when the display control unit cannot correctly receive the first display result command or the second display result command, it notifies that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. be able to. Therefore, the internal state of the gaming machine and the display state can be matched without increasing the control burden of the game control means. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a special gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. In addition, it does not give an impression that the player is disadvantaged as compared with the case where the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied after the notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be.

(7) The game control means transmits a specific game state start command (for example, a fanfare command) indicating start of the specific game state (for example, step S1309 in the game control microcomputer 560). , S1312, S1314, S1316, S1318, S1319, S1323), and the specific gaming state start command transmission means is determined to establish a predetermined transition condition by the first prior determination means or the second prior determination means. A specific gaming state start command (for example, command A000 (H) shown in FIG. 12) that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means. , A001 (H), A003 (H) to A005 H)) (e.g., the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S1312, S1314, S1316, S1318, and S1319), and the display control means uses the non-special display result derivation display means at the time of abnormal reception. On the condition that the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the effect display unit, a specific gaming state that can be specified by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means to establish the predetermined transition condition is started Based on the fact that the command has been transmitted, the post-transition notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control) executes a post-transition notification effect that notifies that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the state is shifted to the specific gaming state. Part for executing steps S1926 to S1939 in the microcomputer 100 for use). It may be.
According to such a configuration, the transition for notifying that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied based on the transmission of the specific gaming state start command capable of specifying that it is determined that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Since it is configured to execute the post-notification effect, even if the display control unit cannot correctly receive the first display result command or the second display result command, it is confirmed that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be notified. Therefore, the internal state of the gaming machine and the display state can be matched without increasing the control burden of the game control means. In addition, since it is possible to produce an effect as if it was promoted to a special gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player. In addition, it does not give an impression that the player is disadvantaged as compared with the case where the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied after the notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Can be.

(8) The game control means transmits a specific game state start command (for example, a fanfare command) indicating that the specific game state is to be started (for example, step S1309 in the game control microcomputer 560). , S1312, S1314, S1316, S1318, S1319, S1323), and the specific gaming state start command transmission means is determined to establish a predetermined transition condition by the first prior determination means or the second prior determination means. A specific gaming state start command (for example, command A000 (H) shown in FIG. 12) that can specify that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means. , A001 (H), A003 (H) to A005 H)) (e.g., the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S1312, S1314, S1316, S1318, and S1319), and the display control means uses the non-special display result derivation display means at the time of abnormal reception. On the condition that the non-special display result is derived and displayed on the effect display unit, a specific gaming state that can be specified by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means to establish the predetermined transition condition is started Based on the fact that the command has been transmitted, the post-transition notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control) executes a post-transition notification effect that notifies that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the state is shifted to the specific gaming state. Portion for executing steps S1926 to S1939 in the microcomputer 100) and post-migration notification When notifying that the predetermined transition condition has been established in the post-transition notification effect by the outgoing execution means, the end-time notification effect prohibiting means (for example, for effect control) prohibits execution of the end-time notification effect by the end-time notification effect execution means. The microcomputer 100 may be configured to include a portion that controls not to move to step S1917 when it is determined as Y in step S1916.
According to such a configuration, since it is configured to prohibit the execution of the notification effect at the end when it is notified that the predetermined transition condition has been established in the post-transition notification effect, the predetermined notification condition is already set in the post-transition notification effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the end-time notification effect is further executed after the post-transition notification effect even though the transition condition is established.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Variable display device 9a 1st decorative symbol display part 9b 2nd decorative symbol display part 9c Background symbol display part 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd Start winning opening 18c Symbol hold memory display 31 Main board 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A first variable display unit that starts variable display of the first identification information and derives and displays a display result based on the fact that the first start condition of variable display is satisfied after the first execution condition of variable display is satisfied; The second variable display unit for starting the variable display of the second identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the fact that the second start condition for the variable display is satisfied after the second execution condition for the variable display is satisfied A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A display state of a predetermined effect display unit that executes variable display of effect information corresponding to variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit and variable display of the second identification information on the second variable display unit Display control means for controlling
The game control means includes
First pre-determining means for determining whether or not the display result of variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is the specific display result;
Second pre-determining means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is the specific display result;
First display result command transmission means for transmitting a first display result command capable of specifying a determination result by the first pre-decision means;
A second display result command transmitting means for transmitting a second display result command capable of specifying a determination result by the second pre-deciding means,
The first display result command transmission means and the second display result command transmission means transmit a common command as the first display result command and the second display result command,
The game control means includes
Based on the determination result of the first pre-determining means, variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display section is executed, and the first variable display section is based on the passage of the variable display time. First variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the display result;
Based on the determination result of the second pre-determining means, variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit is executed, and the second variable display unit based on the fact that the variable display time has elapsed. And second variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the display result,
The display control means includes
Pre-determined result information storage means for storing pre-determined result information indicating the result of determination by the first pre-determining means and the second pre-determining means;
Based on reception of a predetermined command before the first display result command is transmitted by the first display result command transmission means or before the second display result command is transmitted by the second display result command transmission means. A pre-determined result information clear unit for clearing the pre-determined result information stored in the pre-determined result information storage unit;
The first display result command transmitted by the first display result command transmitting means after the predetermined result information stored in the predetermined result information storing means is cleared by the predetermined result information clearing means. Alternatively, a predetermined result information storage control for performing control to store the predetermined result information specified by the second display result command transmitted by the second display result command transmission unit in the predetermined result information storage unit Means,
Variable when the predetermined result information stored in the predetermined result information storage means is read and variable display of the effect information of the predetermined effect display unit is executed based on the read out predetermined result information An effect display execution means for deriving and displaying a display result on the predetermined effect display unit based on the elapse of the display time.

Images